JP2020022699A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing game amusement and enhancing a performance effect.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: display means having at least a first numerical value display area and a second numerical value display area; and performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance in which a numerical value is updated in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area to be a specific value and a special performance in which a suggestion about the predetermined performance is made. The performance execution means can execute a suggestion performance to a content to be displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area, as the special performance. Further, in the case of a super ready-to-win A, an ally character is displayed on an image display device, and a ready-to-win performance is started. When a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the ready-to-win performance, the title of the super ready-to-win A is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device and the sound corresponding to the title name of the ready-to-win is output from a speaker, thereby notifying the title of the super ready-to-win A.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-13

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  A conventional gaming machine displays a plurality of timers (a first numerical display area and a second numerical display area), and performs an effect (special effect) when one of the timer values becomes 0 (specific value). (For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-85082 A

  However, in Patent Literature 1, there is a problem that the entertainment for the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area is not performed at all, and thus the entertainment of the game cannot be improved.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving gaming interest.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, a gaming machine according to a first aspect of the present invention provides
A gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine),
At least a first numerical value display area (for example, an interface area 18SG005I including a normal timer or a remaining game number display area of ART in the modified example 156SG-1) and a second numerical value display area (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer, A display unit (for example, the image display device 5) having the remaining game number display area of the additional zone in the modification 156SG-1;
A predetermined effect that updates a numerical value in at least one of the first numerical value display region and the second numerical value display region to a specific value (for example, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect, or an additional game in the modification 156SG-1) The number is added to the number of remaining games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone), and a special effect (for example, shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A)) for suggesting the predetermined effect. As described above, the effect execution means (for example, a part that notifies the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect with the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B) (for example, Effect control CPU 120);
With
The effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect on the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display region and the second numerical value display region as the special effect (for example, FIG. 10). -22 (A), FIG. 10-23 (A), and FIG. 10-24 (A), the normal timer effect period, the special timer effect period, the normal timer effect period, and the special timer effect period. As shown in a portion in which the sum value is notified in the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, or the modified example 156-1, the number of additional games is determined by the remaining game number of ART and the additional zone. Addition to both of the remaining games)),
further,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an advantageous effect (for example, a reach effect) that indicates that the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player;
Title notifying means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the advantageous suggestion effect,
The title notifying means can notify a title corresponding to the advantageous suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the advantageous suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, as a special effect, an effect that suggests the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area can be executed, so that the entertainment of the game can be improved. In addition, the effect of production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The effect executing means is capable of executing an effect targeting only one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area as the special effect (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 10-22). As shown in FIG. 10-23, the normal timer effect period is notified by the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, and the special timer effect period is set to the first timer effect execution period. (A part notified by the timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the numerical value display area that is the target of the special effect.

The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect,
The effect executing means includes, as the special effect, an effect indicating the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a second timer effect execution suggesting effect illustrated in FIG. 10-26 (F) of the modified example 155SG-2) and the effect already executed. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect indicating a special change in a numerical value in the predetermined effect (for example, an addition effect shown in FIG. 10-26 (C) of the modified example 155SG-2).
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the special effect.

The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
An operation detecting means (for example, a push button 31B) capable of detecting an operation;
The effect performing means is capable of executing an action corresponding effect (for example, a button operation effect) based on a detection result of the operation detecting means,
In the first numerical display area, a first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (B), 15 seconds from the start of the normal timer effect until the decorative symbol becomes a combination of reach) is displayed as the predetermined effect. A display area in which the numerical value becomes the specific value when the time has elapsed,
The second numerical value display area includes a second period that is longer than the first period as the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (B), a cut-in effect starts from the start of the special timer effect). A display area in which the numerical value becomes the specific value when 45 seconds or 55 seconds until the start is elapsed;
During the second period, the rate at which the action corresponding effect is executed is higher than that during the first period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, the button operation effect is always performed during the special timer effect). Is executed, but the button operation effect is not executed during the normal timer effect)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest during the predetermined effect.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4,
The effect executing means,
A change effect (for example, a concealment effect shown in FIG. 10-28 as a modified example 156SG-2) that changes at least one of the first numerical value display region and the second numerical value display region to an invisible state can be executed. ,
When at least one of the first numerical display area and the second numerical display area is in the difficult-to-view state, the numerical value of the numerical display area in the hard-to-view state is not set to the specific value (for example, a modification example). As shown in FIG. 10-28 as 156SG-2, the part where the concealment of the short timer ends before the short timer expires)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the predetermined effect and the change effect can be suitably executed.

In addition, embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions according to the following means 6 to means 13. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that performs a title display for notifying a type of a reach effect at the start of a reach effect, as disclosed in JP-A-2006-101428. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is desired to enhance the effect of the game. In view of this point, there is a demand for a game machine capable of increasing the effect of the game.
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the means 6 according to another aspect includes:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A suggestion effect executing means (eg, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an advantageous effect (eg, reach effect) indicating that the state is controlled to the advantageous state;
Title notifying means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the advantageous suggestion effect,
The title notifying unit can notify a title corresponding to the advantageous suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the advantageous suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the means 7 is the gaming machine according to the means 6,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of advantageous effect effects,
In the plurality of types of advantageous suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executable in a common manner (for example, FIG. 8-2 (C)).
According to such a configuration, it can be noticed which of the advantageous suggestion effects is executed, and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 8 is the gaming machine according to the means 6 or 7,
At a plurality of execution timings during the advantage suggestion effect execution, it is possible to execute a specific effect (e.g., a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
An execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is announced.

The gaming machine of the means 9 is the gaming machine according to any of the means 6 to 8,
The suggestion effect execution means includes at least a first advantage suggestion effect (e.g., a reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second advantage suggestion effect (e.g., a reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the advantageous effect effect. And is executable
In the second advantage suggestion effect, the title notifying means may notify a title corresponding to the second advantage suggestion effect from the start of the second advantage suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, the title can be notified according to the advantageous suggestion effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 10 is the gaming machine according to the means 9,
The ratio of controlling to the advantageous state may be higher when the first advantageous effect is executed than when the second advantageous effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 11 is the gaming machine according to any of the means 6 to 10,
The suggestion effect execution means may be configured to be able to execute the advantageous suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 12 is the gaming machine according to any of the means 6 to 11,
Detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a motion of the player;
Specific display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for performing specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means,
The specific display execution means,
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
In the non-valid period of the detection by the detecting means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 8-10 (E), FIG. 8-11 (I)). )),
In the valid period of the detection by the detection means, an operation effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 8-11 (J) and (K)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 6 to the means 12,
As a suggestion display indicating the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (a first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (a)). And the like, and a second suggestion display having a display size of a second size (a reach title image 31AK062 of a second size displayed at the time of the reach title effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (d)). Means (for example, the image display device 5 and the effect control CPU 120),
The display means,
Elements of different modes (elements E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d). ) Can be displayed (e.g., the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)).
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (Either the shutter image 31AK061 or the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d) may be displayed such that the elements E1 to E5 are included).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately convey that the specific image is displayed.

  It should be noted that the present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, and may have a configuration other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a figure for explaining a fluctuation pattern and a kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of notice effect determination processing. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates the production control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various big hits. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B and big hit C), (C) FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern for loss determination table. It is a flowchart showing a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting value confirmation process. (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clearing process, and (B) is a schematic diagram of a RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing information stored in a RAM and a cleared state. It is an explanatory view showing an initial symbol for each received command. It is an explanatory view showing a notification mode at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of effect control process processing. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a setting change process in a modified example. It is a flow chart which shows a part of effect control main processing in a modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. It is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. (A) is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a big hit type determination table, (B) is a figure which shows the content of various big hits. It is a figure showing a game control data holding area. It is a figure which shows the data holding area for effect control. It is a figure which shows a part of effect control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is an explanatory view of a determination ratio of a normal timer effect and a special timer effect and each timer effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the reach notification mode in a normal timer effect, and the effect result determination ratio of a button operation effect during a special timer effect. It is a figure showing a production mode decision ratio of a cut-in production. It is a figure which shows the execution determination ratio of each timer effect execution suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal timer effect execution process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special timer effect execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a button operation effect execution process. It is a flowchart at the time of performing only a normal timer effect. It is a flowchart at the time of performing only a special timer effect, and a flowchart at the time of performing both a normal timer effect and a special timer effect. It is a figure showing the display mode of an image display device. It is a figure showing the display mode of an image display device. It is a figure showing the display mode of an image display device. It is a figure showing the display mode of an image display device. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image display device according to a modification. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine with a gaming machine frame opened. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a losing fluctuation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a non-reach loss variation pattern judgment table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process and a setting change process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating processing executed when power is turned on. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of a display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a figure for explaining the specification in each set value. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of various effects. It is explanatory drawing which shows the continuation rate suggestion effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of continuation rate suggestion production processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a reservation consecutive production decision table and a production decision table at the time of a reservation consecutive production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a reservation consecutive production process. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a setting suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows a setting suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the setting suggestion effect determination table of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a setting suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows a setting suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect process. It is a figure showing the information display device concerning characteristic part 109AK. It is a figure showing RAM clear situation at the time of starting concerning characteristic part 109AK. It is a figure showing the example of display operation of the information display concerning the characteristic part 109AK. It is a figure showing the example of display operation of the information display concerning the characteristic part 109AK. It is a figure showing the example of display operation of the information display concerning the characteristic part 109AK. It is a figure showing the example of display operation of the information display concerning the characteristic part 109AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counting effect setting processing concerning the characteristic part 110AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in the counting effect setting process concerning the characteristic part 110AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in the counting effect setting process concerning the characteristic part 110AK. It is a figure which shows the content of the effect of the counting effect concerning the characteristic part 110AK. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation concerning feature part 110AK. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation concerning feature part 110AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device and driven into the game area.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of kinds of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a numeral indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of a special symbol means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed so as to be variable (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. On the image display device 5, various effect images are displayed.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern indicating a number or the like). Is variably displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down). (Scroll display of direction and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the number of suspended storages. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, there are provided a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs. Displays the first number of reserved storages, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second number of reserved storages based on the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port that is always kept in a fixed open state by which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting prize port that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is Is in the closed state where the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is on (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. It should be noted that the variable winning ball device 6B only needs to change between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to be opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and a special winning opening as a specific area that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball becomes large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is on, the special winning opening door opens the large winning opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special winning opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called a normal symbol game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a pass gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the general-purpose game is executed.

  Above the ordinary symbol display 20, there is provided an ordinary symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games for which execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Loudspeakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for a gaming effect is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which a prize ball is paid out when the upper plate is full is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation or the like) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

  (Outline of the progress of the game)

  A game ball is fired toward a game area by a rotation operation by a player on a hit ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol game on the ordinary symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general-purpose game based on the passage). The general-purpose game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”. When "per day" is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state, which will be described later. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, “7”, an actual symbol is different depending on the type of big hit described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, the big hit symbol is obtained. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the above is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the state is controlled to the small hit game state.

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

  Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special winning opening (the number of rounds and the upper limit period of opening) and a game state after the big hit game state (a normal state, a time saving state, a probable change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared. The type has been set. As the big hit type, a big hit type where many prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type where few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hitting game state, the opening mode is the same as the big hitting game state in the case of some of the big hit types (the number of opening of the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same). Etc.) to open the big winning opening. In addition, similarly to the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit game state is ended, the time may be controlled to a time saving state or a certain change state depending on the big hit type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure fluctuation time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is performed as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average time of fluctuating fluctuating time (period of fluctuating fluctuating figure) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "per-figure hit" in the frug drawing game is improved than in the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that allow the game balls to easily enter the second start winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, and is therefore an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than that in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the state is likely to be a “big hit”.

  The time saving state and the probable change state continue until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. The condition that the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times is an end condition is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time-saving state, a probable change state, or the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special map game will be a "big hit", is set in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed). This is a state in which the same control is performed as when the processing is not executed).

  The state in which the probable change control is being executed is also referred to as a high-probability state, and the state in which the probable change control is not being executed is referred to as a low-probability state. The state in which the time-saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time-saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the probable change state is a high-precision high-base state, and the normal state is also a low-probability low-base state. The high-accuracy low-base state is also referred to as a high-accuracy low-base state.

  After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to have “small hit”.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 is provided. May be performed by turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also stopped (derived).

  During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described below. Is continued.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also referred to as a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation) in which a display result (a display result of a special figure game or a display result of a variable display of a decorative pattern) becomes a "big hit" according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of "probable change big hit" controlled to the probable change state after the big hit game state ends, odd decorative symbols (for example, "7") are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state ends, the probable change state is set. In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After the non-probable design has reached the reach mode, a promotion effect that eventually becomes a “probable change” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach loss”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative design variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display display result. ) May be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effects include a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display with execution suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Also, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

  During the big hit game state, a big hit effect is performed to notify the big hit game state. As the large hit production, a production that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By performing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting game state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

  Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, , A random number circuit 104 and an input / output port (I / O) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, data to be referred to when making various determinations to be described later, and various tables) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like (solenoid driving signal) is provided.

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass or exit) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start-up switch (first start-up switch 22A and second start-up switch 22B), count switch 23). (Such as a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle enters) and is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door. Transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, the effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12 The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), A game state (for example, start and end of variable display, opening state of a special winning opening, occurrence of a prize, number of storages held, game state), a command for specifying an error occurrence, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, notification of an error, and notification of restoration of a power failure).

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and Determination, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content). In some cases, the control unit 123 is instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 displays an effect image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating a lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs a sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

  The lamp control board 14 includes various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. I do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the turning on / off of the lamp.

  The sound output, control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) are executed by the effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for inputting an effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 or the like, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port.

  Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the voice control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after ending the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  When receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of the jackpot, etc.) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the start information (start It outputs data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.), probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed, etc.) (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized. See below).

  Subsequent to the special symbol processing, the ordinary symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every time the timer is interrupted, and manages the execution and suspension of the general symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), Opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per day" is enabled. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out award balls, and the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a command control process (Step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as a special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of stored holds is executed. When a winning start occurs, a random number for determining a display result (including a big hit type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of storages to be held, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating a determination result such as occurrence of a start winning prize, the number of storages to be held, and pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the winning start-up thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination processing in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processing in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S120), transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", or the big hit type in the case of "big hit" Is determined (prior determination) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1”, and the special special pattern normal processing ends. Note that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the order of winning the game balls into the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in the order of the winning (also referred to as winning the order).

  When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting processing, any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is used by using a random number value for variation pattern determination based on a result of a predetermined determination as to whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. And the like are determined. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. Is designated (variable display pattern, etc.).

  The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. The special symbol change processing includes a process for setting a special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to change. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation reaches the special figure fluctuation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol fluctuation processing ends.

  The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the change of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The processing for making the setting is included. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “losing”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. If the display result is "small hit" or "losing", the game state is updated when the time reduction state or the probable change state is controlled and the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit gaming state and setting a big winning opening to an open state based on a display result of “big hit” or the like. Have been. When opening the special winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an opening upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to, for example, the type of the big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit opening processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during the opening of the jackpot is based on a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the jackpot, and on the basis of the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. For determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing such as stopping supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the opening of the big hit ends.

  The post-big hit release processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The post-big hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the special winning opening is opened has reached a set upper limit number of times, and a process of determining whether or not the number of hits has reached the upper limit number of times. And the like to perform a setting for terminating the process. When the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release processing ends.

  The big hit end processing in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, and a change in response to the end of the big hit game state. The processing includes various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit release pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting the large winning opening to the open state in the small hitting game state based on the display result being “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit opening processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". The processing during opening of the small hits includes processing for measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and timing for returning the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When the big winning port is returned to the closed state and the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening processing ends.

  The small hit end processing in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed is performed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be disabled. However, when a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, the interrupt is disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt processing.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command that has been read is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. For example, it turns on a provided reception flag. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

  After executing the command analysis processing in step S75, an effect control process processing is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative illuminant such as a decoration LED, a movable body 32 The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of the device, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed on the control content of the rendering operation using the various rendering devices in accordance with the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process illustrated in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a start control effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of held memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether to start variable display of a decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether a command for designating the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11 or the like. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process ends.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative design variable display (fixed decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5 by instructing the display control unit 123. Driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and transmitting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects control such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by the output is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. After performing such an effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative symbol from the main board 11 is received. In response to, for example, the fixed decoration symbol which is the display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The wait process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. To ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the small hit effect effect processing. Also, if the reception wait time of the command has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game is “losing”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the wait process per special figure ends.

  The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . In addition, in the small hit effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit production process ends.

  The small hit end effect processing in step S175 is processing executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and performs various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. Execute Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect process ends.

  The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In this big hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In the big hit middle rendering process, the value of the rendering control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending rendering process in response to, for example, receiving a command designating the big hit gaming state from the main board 11. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Execute. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the gaming media is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button and the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted.

  The programs and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. It may be in a form of being distributed by being installed in a storage device included in the storage device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In this specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “differentiate”) is that one of the ratios is “0%”. May be included. For example, it may include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8A is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern PA1-1, PA1 of the non-reach-losing pattern in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode and the display result is "losing". -2. The display results are "big hits" such as reach loss variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "losing". Are prepared. PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach AE are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that indicates that it is controlled to the big hit state. The reliability when each reach is executed (big hit reliability) is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1 (B). Normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach Reach B <Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it becomes a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. In addition, during the super-reach reach effect, an advanced effect that evolves (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. shown in FIG. 8A are the fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8A illustrates a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves to a super-reach one step higher, but a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of the reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and sound. As described above, the notification of the title is executed by the effect device of the reach with the higher reliability than the reach with the lower reliability. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively fueled, and the effect of the performance is improved. Note that the title notification mode may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the font of the title character (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and the typeface (line, square, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the content of the effect of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of the production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of a rendering operation according to the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3 are diagrams illustrating an example of the super-reach effect operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. ing. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number 7 on the “left” and “right” stops, and the reach mode is reached. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8C, the character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses from the start of the super-reach effect, such as when the introduction part of the super-reach effect (also referred to as the super-reach effect) ends, as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of super reach A (here, the character of "SP reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and the sound (here, "super reach A") corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8. Thus, the title of Super Reach A is announced. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is deleted, the character 31AK003, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK003 are displayed as shown in FIG. Is performed, the subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which the characters confront each other is also referred to as a battle effect. In the battle effect, if a friendly character wins, a big hit occurs, and if the friendly character loses, a loss occurs.

  In addition, when the words are displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, a sound corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Also, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8E, and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super reach effect, such as when the introduction part of the super reach effect ends, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. (Here, the character “SP Reach B”) is displayed, and a sound (here, “Super Reach B”) corresponding to the title of Reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach B is displayed. Be informed. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 8G, the character 31AK006, which is the enemy character, is displayed. Is performed, the subsequent portion of the reach effect of the super reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction part of the super reach effect is shown to the player, and the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Also, super reach A (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And super reach B (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G)...) In the introduction part before the title is announced, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2 (C)). In this way, the player can be noticed which super-reach is to be made since the super-reach effect is started, and which title is to be notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to the completely common production mode until the title is announced. At least one super-reach can be determined by watching the production, for example. The sections may have a common effect mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) may be executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. As described above, the title notification may be executed after the super reach can be specified.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character of “SP Reach D”) is displayed at a part of the center of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At the same time, a sound (here, “defeat the enemy”) corresponding to the title of the reach is output from the speaker 8, thereby notifying the title of the super reach D. As described above, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Under the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion indication 31AK008 indicating the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but does not have to completely match the big hit reliability of the reach.

  It should be noted that the notification by the voice of Super Reach D does not report the title as it is, but reports the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice differs depending on the type of the reach. Thereby, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is announced in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach effect. Although FIG. 8-2 (I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 8-2 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D is executed. You may.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8J, the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is performed. Be executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 8A, the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character of “SP Reach E”) is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5. Then, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In the super reach E, the notification of the title by voice is not performed. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is an enemy character, are displayed. Be executed. As described above, in the super reach E, the title is notified in accordance with the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach E, the title 31AK010 is continuously displayed during the reach effect.

  In the reach effect of the super reach E having a low jackpot reliability, by giving the title information without stopping the progress of the reach effect, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation. On the other hand, in the reach effects of the super reach A, the super reach B and the super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Also, in contrast to this embodiment, in a super-reach reach production with a high jackpot reliability, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach effect of the super reach having a low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the superreach effect, and Super Reach D and Super Reach have low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production, but the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production in the case of the reach with a high jackpot reliability, and the super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. Is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing so, the title notification corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, title notification is executed in a wider display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be such that the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the entire background is displayed as a title notification background. (Title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Also, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method for changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be made different.

(Expectation degree suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in the super reach A and the super reach B having the high jackpot reliability, the super reach D having the lower jackpot reliability than the super reach A and the super reach B is displayed without displaying the indication of the expectation. In the title notification in, an indication of the degree of expectation was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, an indication of the degree of expectation is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach E.

  In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, and the expectation degree may be indicated by a meter or a gauge, or may be indicated. May be displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, in the case where the number of black stars is indicated, half (or half) black stars may be displayed, and the number of stages of the degree of expectation may be increased. .

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, it is possible to pay attention to the reach effect. Further, in the super reach D and the super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until a predetermined effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of the reach can be grasped even during the super reach effect. Further, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in any case in order to improve the effect.

  Note that, here, the effect of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted, but for example, a title notification or an expectation suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decided production)
When it is time to derive the display result (the end of the variable display) after each reach effect has been executed, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a "big hit" is executed. The determined effect includes a determined effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a determined effect indicating that the display result is "losing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), a fixed effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is “big hit”, an image 31AK013 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8C, and as shown in FIG. A definitive decorative symbol to be a big hit combination is derived. If the display result is "losing", an image indicating that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the fixed effect is executed. Thereby, it is possible to pay attention to the determined effect, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

  In the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative design is reduced at the lower right portion of the image display device 5 and the variable display is executed. The way of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach effect may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  In addition, when the character display which is resident during the hold display, the active display, and the variable display, and the display related to the mobile communication are displayed on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately not displayed during the super-reach reach effect so as to focus on the reach effect. It may be. At this time, these displays may be kept displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting a low-reliability reach effect, and to pay attention to the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development stage)
Next, an example of an effect operation when an extended effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the extended effect is executed when the reach effect of super reach D is executed (the title notification of super reach D is executed), FIG. As shown in (B), an effect in which the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. Thereafter, in the case of developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8C, the title of Super Reach A is announced, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. In the case of developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 8D, the title of Super Reach B is announced, and Reach production of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the title of the reach of the development destination. As illustrated in FIG. 8D, when the reach of the development destination is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), but may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (indicating failure). It may be displayed. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be performed. It should be noted that there may be a development effect of gasses, such as a performance in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 is configured such that black stars indicating the expectation degree are displayed from the beginning. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), when notifying the title of Super Reach D, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the degree of expectation indication display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound of “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed step by step each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation has been accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted, as shown in FIG. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expected degree suggestion effect has been completed.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F), the black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. One or more items may be displayed, and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Alternatively, half black stars may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of displayed stars (the number of stages of rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the effect indicating the degree of expectation is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. Regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, the same black star image is displayed and fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases increases Such an effect may be performed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even when the same command (for example, a command designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif displayed on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speaker 8, and the like need only be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by a player's operation.

  FIGS. 8-5 (G) to (L) are examples of the production operation of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion production when the special mode is set when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production mode. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is a reach effect of the super reach D2 having a different effect form from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G). At this time, a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but a voice different from the normal mode (for example, a voice having a different voice color) is output. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound of “pong” indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. When the number of black diamonds corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black diamonds are highlighted, as shown in FIG. In this way, by making the notification mode of the title different depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the selection of the player, the game state, and the like, the effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. improves.

  FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the production operation in the case where the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is designated. (Including a suggested effect) may be made different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether to notify the title of the reach or the execution ratio of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the preference of the player, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the degree of expectation is indicated by the number of black stars in the degree of expectation suggestion display, and an expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is performed. May be executed to gradually reduce the number of displays that indicate the degree of expectation. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to, or instead of, the expectation effect effect of this embodiment.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, in the case where the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the title of Super Reach D is announced, and after the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, the image is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B). An extended effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the character of “SP Reach C”) is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C). , The title of Super Reach C is announced. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the title of the reach of the development destination. Under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 having three black stars is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect in which the title or the expected degree suggestion display changes may be executed.

(Preliminary production)
In this embodiment, a title announcement for announcing the jackpot reliability is executed as an announcement effect according to the title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 8A, the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black, and a sound corresponding to the title name of Reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach A is displayed. Is notified, a title notice that the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B). As described above, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the display of the title.

  When a title notice in which the title display mode (display color) is changed is executed, after the title display mode has been changed, a sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The title notification by voice may be executed after the title display mode (display color) changes. In this case, a sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of an effect (specific effect) such as a notice effect or an advanced effect, in which the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot advantageous state is improved. By doing in this way, once the title is announced, an effect of increasing the degree of expectation can be executed, and thus the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect and an effect mode. The announcement effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super-reach fluctuation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If the pattern is a super-reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super-reach (whether or not to execute a title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined in accordance with the determination ratio shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8A, the display color of the Super Reach title changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and “black” to “fruit pattern”. The ones that change and those that change from “red” to “fruit pattern” are provided, and the big hit reliability increases in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing of change of the title display color. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  The “fruit pattern” may be such that the title character is displayed in bold and the character itself is a “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area may be a “fruit pattern” . There may be a pattern displayed as a “fruit pattern” from the beginning. As for the display color that changes, the display color may change after the title notification is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-7. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes depending on the type of super reach may be made different. In the case of super reach having a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided, and the changing timing may be determined to any one. In the case of a super reach having a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or a smaller number than a super reach having a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a different rate from the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. As described above, by making the execution mode (display color and display color change timing) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the character display mode (for example, the display color of the line) in the super reach reach effect.

  After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the words of the character in the reach attainment of the super reach (whether or not to execute the speech notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the lines in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), the display colors of the lines in the reach effect include “white”, “red”, and those that change from “white” to “red”, in this order (ascending order). ) Has increased the jackpot reliability. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the display color of the dialogue changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the performance effect is improved. In the case where the display color changes, the display color may change after the words are displayed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  The big hit reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the speech notice. For example, when the same announcement mode (display color) is included in the title announcement and the dialogue announcement, if the same announcement mode is achieved, the big hit reliability may be increased. In addition, the big hit reliability may be different depending on the combination of the timing of change of the presentation mode between the title notice and the speech notice. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change occurs first. By doing in this way, it is possible to pay attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined at a different rate from the normal mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  Note that, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect in which the reliability of the big hit is foreseen by a change in the effect mode of the reach effect may be executed. In this case, in the notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that the pattern is not a variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence or absence of another notice effect and the effect form are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (Step AK31S005), and the announcement effect determination processing ends.

  Note that in this embodiment, a title advance notice and a dialogue advance notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but in the case of a specific super reach (for example, a super reach with low reliability), the title advance notice is provided. And at least one of dialogue notices may be made executable. In addition, the title announcement and the dialogue of the dialogue have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, but the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, even if the determination ratio is changed according to the type of super reach, Good. By doing so, a notice effect can be performed according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable effect modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between a title notice and a dialogue notice. By doing in this way, the effects can be diversified and the effect of the effects can be enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing so, a notice effect with a sense of unity can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
When the presentation mode of the title notice and the dialogue of the dialogue change, an effect indicating that the presentation mode changes may be executed. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an effect effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the line may be changed. The effect mode of the action effect (action effect image and the like) may be common to both the title and the line. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change despite the execution of the action effect. In the case of executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result regarding the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the speech notice changes in the effect mode (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect. The ratio of the effect of the effect and the effect of the line notice (the ratio of the effect) may be different, or the ratio of the color (how many steps) the effect changes may be different. . By executing such an action effect, when the action effect image is displayed, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the line is to be applied, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence or absence of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect mode. By doing in this way, an action effect corresponding to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of one of a title and a line in accordance with the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the effect content of a character motion or a battle effect). May be changed. In this way, the player pays attention to the content of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all of the features described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Here, it is referred to as a sub liquid crystal, but the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5 or the like, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and display of a hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be executed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, when the title is displayed continuously after the notification of the title, the display of the title and the degree of expectation may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the image display device 5 notifies the title, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the expected degree suggestion display. By doing so, it is possible to display the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display are also easy to understand.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of a title of a reach effect as a suggestive effect has been described. You may. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when performing a look-ahead zone effect of shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, and the like) in which the background image and the effect mode on the image display device 5 are different, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When a mission ("Let's reach at 7", "Eliminate enemies using a stick controller", etc.) is presented, and a mission effect that is advantageous to the player when the mission is completed is executed, The present invention may be applied to notification of a title of a mission.

(Modified Example 31AK-1 of Characteristic Part 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, the determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and thereafter, the display result is displayed ( FIG. 8-3 (B)-(D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the winning or losing of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing so, the display result is displayed in accordance with the operation of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

  FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super reach effect operation in the modification 31AK-1 in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is displayed according to the operation. After reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), for example, as shown in FIG. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 8-11 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C). Thereby, an operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification 31AK-1, a plurality of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is to be executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode having higher reliability.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. It changes to the large button image 31AK047.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in the modification 31AK-1, when the operation effect image changes, an effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without accompanying the effect effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of the effect effect.

  Thereafter, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is moved to the center part as shown in FIG. Is displayed, and a display urging the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. At this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. If an operation is not detected within a predetermined operation validity period, the image shown in FIG. 8-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In the modification 31AK-1, the operation effect images include a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image, and the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. And the reliability of the jackpot is higher. Even when an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, the operation effect image may change to a highly reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved and the expectation of the player is improved. Can be maintained.

  8-10 and FIG. 8-11, the notification of the reach title and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted, but the reach effect shown in FIG. 8-10 and FIG. 8-11 is omitted. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination of the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether or not there is an operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, whether or not there is an effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Modified Example 31AK-2 of Characteristic Part 31AK)
A suggestion indicating the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state may be displayed. For example, a shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and a reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display after the start of the variable display is executed. In the reach title effect, after the reach, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating a development destination of the reach effect is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image with a high jackpot reliability displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plural types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when a reach title is displayed during execution of the reach effect, when a fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <a blue image <a red image <a fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a red title reach title). Then, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When the shutter display and the reach title display are performed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such a shutter display and a reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 8-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8A, when the shutter effect is performed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is performed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is performed, and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is performed. When the shutter that has been closed is opened, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. Downward arrows indicate variable display of left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8D, the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, at the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed at the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of the super reach to be executed from now on are shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Also, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters “Battle Reach” indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is executed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of issuing a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability, such as "hot hot", is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the common sound and the specific sound have completely separated output periods has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the character "BATTLE WIN!" Is displayed at the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect ends, the display returns to the variable display screen using the original numeric symbols. As shown in FIG. 8F, all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 8A and 8D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this way, a fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thereby, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d). Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  The shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8D are displayed at different timings. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to the overlapping of the execution timings.

  The determination regarding the shutter effect (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) may be performed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 8-8. In that case, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 in FIG. 8-8. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Also, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 8-8 together with the determination regarding the shutter effect.

(Explanation about the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. Note that a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 122SG of the present embodiment is the same as the above-described feature section 31AK, and thus a description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the main substrate 11 in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment is housed in a substrate case 122SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 122SG051 for switching between a setting change state in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed and a setting confirmation state in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be checked. A setting changeover switch 122SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) described later in a setting change state, and an opening sensor 122SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3. Is provided.

  The setting switch main body provided with an operation unit operable by the player, such as the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting switch 122SG052, is housed in the board case 122SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting switch 122SG052. Are exposed on the back side through an opening formed on the left side of the back surface of the substrate case 122SG201 so that the operation can be performed without opening the substrate case 122SG201.

  Since the board case 122SG201 having the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 3 with the gaming machine frame 3 closed. The operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 3 by using it. Further, the lock switch 122SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a clerk or the like of the game arcade, so that only a clerk having the setting key can operate the lock switch 122SG051. The lock switch 122SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation) by using a setting key. In the characteristic section 122SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are exemplified as separate keys, but these keys may be shared by one key.

  Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is opened. This is the front when viewing the scene, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And an LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 9-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the feature section 122SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte representing MODE (command classification) and the second byte representing EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 9A is an example, and another command form may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 9A, the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating a variation start in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content of the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), a result of determining whether the variable display result is “losing”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result) ), And different EXT data are set according to the result of determining which of the plurality of types is the big hit type when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” (big hit type determination result).

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “losing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the stop (decision) of the decoration symbol in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is a game state (high base state) in which time reduction control is performed. , Time-saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command for specifying the occurrence of an error (abnormal) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the generated error (abnormal). In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormality) has been determined to have occurred on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by an error notification process described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fan fare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening that notifies that the special winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type decision result by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during opening of the special winning opening and the notification command after opening of the special winning opening, different EXT data is set in accordance with the number of rounds executed (for example, “1” to “15”) in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. This is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning port and the first starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved storages decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of the execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be used.

  The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (restoration of power interruption, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up by clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the operation of changing the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the setting changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value change operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended. The command E105H is a setting value confirmation start notification command for wp notification that the operation of confirming the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in a setting change state). The command E106H is a setting value confirmation end notification command for notifying that the setting value confirmation operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and updates numerical data indicating a random value independently of the CPU 103. It comprises a random number circuit 104 for performing, an input / output port (I / O) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data in the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the data, and a Reading operation, CPU 103 receiving an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and CPU 103 outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. And a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-4, in the characteristic portion 122SG of this embodiment, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determination, the random number value MR4 for determining the ordinary figure display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. It should be noted that other random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

  In this embodiment, an example is shown in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 9-4. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 9-5 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the fluctuation display result is “losing”, the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is “big hit”. In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is “small hit”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “losing” and the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is called a non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as a “non-reach loss fluctuation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “loss”. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit fluctuation pattern. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern.

  The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach, normal reach α, normal reach β,. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ, in addition to super reach α and super reach β, may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of the normal reach is performed in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment is the super reach variation pattern of super reach α and super reach β. It is set shorter than. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is performed, The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the super reach β, the super reach α, and the normal reach are set so that the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” so that the big hit expectation becomes higher. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of the big hit.

  In the characteristic section 122SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, and the like. Rather than determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after the determination beforehand, only the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number for pattern type determination, the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type is determined. It may be determined the variation pattern to be executed from.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-5, an example is shown in which the variation content (effect content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (effect content) may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach loss, when the set value is 1, the variation pattern becomes the normal reach loss, and when the set value is 2, the pseudo continuous effect is performed. When the set value is 3 as the variation pattern that is executed twice and the non-reach is lost, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed three times and the variation pattern becomes the super reach loss.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7 and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various types of determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11 and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. And a variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), and FIG. -6 (C), a display result determination table (set value 3), a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), and a big hit type determination shown in FIG. 9-7 (B). In addition to the table (for the second special symbol), a large hit variation pattern determination table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, a loss variation pattern determination table, a general figure display result determination table (not shown), and a general figure variation pattern determination table (not shown) ) Etc. are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit and the small hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in a special symbol normal process of a special symbol process process described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed. Has become. The set value has three stages of 1 to 3, 3 is the highest payout rate, and the payout rate decreases as the value decreases in the order of 3, 2, 1. That is, when 3 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 2 and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. In other words, the setting value, which is the largest value 3, is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller the value in the order of 2, 1 becomes the more advantageous value for the game arcade side.

  FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, separate display result determination tables may be used for the first and second special maps.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is the probable change state (high-precision state), the normal state or the time-saving state (low) (Determination state) is assigned to the special map display result of “big hit”. Thereby, in the probable change state (high-precision state) in which the probable change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time-saving state (low-probability state) is set, the special map display result is set to the "big hit" to control the big hit gaming state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/250 when the set value is 2, and 1/99 when the set value is 3) In comparison, the probability that the special map display result is determined to be controlled to the big hit game state with the “big hit” as the big hit is increased (in the feature section 122SG of this embodiment, when the set value is 1, 1/150, and the set value is 1/99 for 2 and 1/50 for 3 That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probable state (high-accuracy state), the probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state so that is increased.

  In addition, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the determination value is assigned so that the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be the small hitting game state and controlled to the small hitting game state is the same. Have been. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), the special figure display result is set to “small hit” to control the small hit game state regardless of the game state and the set value. Then, the probability to be determined is set to 1/200. Note that, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the form in which the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit” and the control is made to control the small hitting game state regardless of the set value is the same probability is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hitting game state by setting the special figure display result to “small hitting” may be changed according to the set value.

  Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the special figure display result is set to “big hit” or “small hit”, and the big hit gaming state or the small hit The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is low, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the special map display result is set to "big hit" or "small hit". The determination value is assigned so that the probability of being determined to be controlled when the state is controlled is increased (big hit probability and small hit probability: setting value 3> setting value 2> setting value 1).

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines that the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C). If any one of the hit determination values matches, the special symbol is determined to be a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). When MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), it is determined that the special symbol is to be set as the small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to a big hit gaming state, but to determine whether to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol. Determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hitting game state. However, the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is performed. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a small hit symbol.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the display probability determination tables shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability per small hit is the same regardless of which display result determination table is used (regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1). It may be.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C). However, a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table are separately provided for each set value, and it is individually determined whether or not the fluctuation display result is a big hit or a small hit. Is also good. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), a judgment value is assigned to each small hit in each display result judgment table, but as shown in FIG. 9-6 (A). In the display result determination table (display result determination table referred to when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1), the determination value may not be assigned to the small hit. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

  In the present embodiment, a total of three setting values 1 to 3 are provided as settable values for the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

  FIGS. 9-7 (A) and 9-7 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, FIG. 9-7 (A) determines the big hit type using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the first special symbol is changed and displayed). It is a table in the case of doing. In addition, FIG. 9-7 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a case table.

  The big hit type determination table indicates that the type of the big hit is one of the big hits A to C based on the hit type determining random number (MR2) when it is determined that the variation display result is a big hit symbol. Is a table referred to in order to determine

  Here, the big hit type in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as the big hit type, a big hit A (also referred to as a non-probable variable big hit) in which only the time-saving control is executed after the big hit game state ends and the state shifts to the low-probability high-base state, After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and a big hit B or a big hit C (also referred to as a big change big hit) which shifts to the high-accuracy high-base state is set.

  The jackpot game state by the "big hit A" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "B" is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed ten times (so-called ten rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

  The time-saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is executed by executing a predetermined number of special figure games (100 times in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment), or The game ends when the big hit game state is reached before the figure game is executed.

  On the other hand, the high-precision control and the time-saving control executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the big hit game state is ended. Therefore, when the jackpot that has recurred is the jackpot B or the jackpot C, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed without going through the normal state. , A so-called extended-villa state.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which three types of big hits A to big hit C are provided as big hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit types are two. You may provide below kind, or four or more kinds.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9A, in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 199 are assigned to the big hit B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are allocated to the big hit A, and 100 to 149 are allocated to the big hit B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

  As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the rate of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is finished is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game is finished. Of the big hit B and the big hit C in which both the positive change and the positive change control are executed, the ratio of determining the big hit C becomes lower in the order of the set values 3, 2, and 1. In other words, when the fluctuating special figure is the first special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 3 is 3, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is 1 when the payout rate is the lowest.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range of MR2 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the big hit B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, from 0 to 299 of the determination value range of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (No judgment value is assigned to the big hit B).

  As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the rate of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the big hit B and the big hit C in which both the positive change and the positive change control are executed, the ratio of determining the big hit C becomes lower in the order of the set values 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the fluctuation special figure is the second special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is 1 when the payout rate is the lowest.

  In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, if the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In the case where the determination rate of the jackpot type is different depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, even when the fluctuation special map is the second special map and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, a case where the big hit type is determined to be the big hit B may be provided. .

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is the big hit varies depending on the set value, so that the gaming interest can be improved. It has become.

  In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the big hit type is determined using MR2 which is a random value for big hit type determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The determination may be performed using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous to the player (the bigger hit probability and the smaller hit probability are increased, and the big hit C as the big hit type is determined. Although the embodiment is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, the more advantageous the player may be. .

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, while the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the form in which the gaming property itself does not change is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game performance may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is set to a gaming property (a so-called probability variation loop type) in which the probability variation state loops at a rate of 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable prize ball device 7 during the jackpot game. On the other hand, the game state after the end of the big hit game is controlled to be in a certain change state, while the rate of passing of the game ball through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the variation special figure (so-called V). If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during the high base (during the time reduction control). Ball is specially variable A predetermined switch provided in the sphere device 7 may be a game of (so-called one two-kind mixed type) which controls the jackpot gaming state based on passing. Furthermore, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as 1 to 3, the gaming property is the same. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

  Further, when changing the playability in accordance with the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable prize ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes the predetermined region, Used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the fact that a game ball has passed the predetermined switch, It may be used as a switch for controlling to a big hit game state.

  Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. Is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a variation pattern determination table for a big hit which is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “big hit”, and the variation display result is “small hit”. A variation pattern determination table for a big hit that is used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for a loss that is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “losed” is prepared in advance. ing.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take is assigned as a determination value.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table (the jackpot A) used when the jackpot type is the jackpot A is used. ) And a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is for jackpot B and jackpot C are prepared in advance. A) and the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C) include the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and the super reach β big hit For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number within a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take The value is assigned as the judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, in the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit A), when the set value is “1”, one of the determination value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 Up to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, 401 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 351 to 825 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is allocated, and the fluctuation pattern of 826 to 997 is allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the range of the determination value of MR3 1 to 997, 1 to 300 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 301 to 800 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is allocated, and the fluctuation patterns 801 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

  As shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), in the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C), when the set value is “1”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, , 1 to 100 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, 101 to 350 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 351 to 997 are assigned to the It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “2”, from 1 to 997 of the determination value range of MR3, 1 to 150 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 151 to 450 are assigned. The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 201 to 550 are assigned. The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit.

  As described above, when the jackpot A is won in the special map game, the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. Higher and higher in the order of setting values 3, 2, and 1. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special map game, the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the superreach α jackpot. The ratio is higher than the ratio and decreases in the order of the set values 3, 2, and 1.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when the type of the big hit is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, since the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may determine that “big hit B” or “big hit C” may be obtained. Expectations can be increased.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take with respect to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) is determined. Assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9C, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any one of 1, 2, and 3, the determination value range of MR3 is 0 to 0. Of 997, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as small hit variation patterns. With the setting values 1, 2, and 3, the variation pattern of the small hit may be determined at a different ratio from the plurality of variation patterns.

  Further, the loss variation pattern determination table includes a loss variation pattern determination table A that is used when the number of stored games is one or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time saving control, and a low base. Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and variation for loss used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is the high base state in which the time saving control is performed are prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned to the variation pattern of β loss (PA2-3) as the determination value.

  As shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for one or less low base medium total pending storage number), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and up to 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach, which correspond to the total number of reserved storages of 2 to 4, are reduced. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range in which a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), in the loss variation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storages), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 Are allocated to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are allocated to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach that correspond to the total number of stored memories of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range in which a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 9-10 (C), in the loss variation pattern determination table C (for five or more low base medium total pending storages), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and up to 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss corresponding to the time reduction control are shown. PA2-2) and a variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range where the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can be.

  As shown in FIG. 9D, in the loss variation pattern determination table D (for high-base medium use), when the set value is “1”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach loss, 551 to 700 are assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to super reach α. Loss variation patterns (PA2-2) are assigned, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  As described above, when the loss variation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach variation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach variation pattern is , Set values 3, 2, and 1 in this order. Further, when using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the variation values of 701 to 900 among the determination values are the variation patterns of the super reach α loss, and the variation values of 901 to 997 are the variation of the super reach β loss regardless of the variation pattern determination table. If the fluctuation display result is lost, that is, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by the common determination ratio regardless of the set value, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined. It is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

  It should be noted that the “common determination ratio” in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment is not only the one in which the determination ratio is completely the same with different set values (the characteristic portion 122SG in the present embodiment), but also different set values. (For example, the setting ratio of the super reach variation pattern differs by about 1% between the set values 1 to 3).

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the form in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of all fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the variation pattern of any of non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

  Further, in characteristic section 122SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Although an example in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. If the variable display result is lost, the super reach α The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss, regardless of the set value. Exemplifies a mode in which the set value is the same regardless of the set value that is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of the set value, the change ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, a mode in which the determination ratio of the non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern is different according to the set setting value is illustrated, but it is set. Depending on the set value that is present, one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns may be present among the non-reach fluctuation patterns and the normal reach fluctuation patterns. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value that has been set means that one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or that the specific variation pattern is 100%. It also includes the determination of the percentage.

  The variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation of the non-reach loss is smaller than the variation pattern (PA1-2). The variation time of the pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see FIG. 9-5). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, and the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of four. Sometimes, when the start winning is made, it becomes difficult to cause useless starting winning in which the holding memory is not made, and when the number of the holding memories is reduced, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss without shortening the fluctuation time is long. By determining PA1-1), it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the variable display time is lengthened.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (A) to 9-10 (C), the variation is determined by using a loss Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The variation pattern may be determined using a different loss pattern determination table depending on the number of stored special symbols and the variation display of the second special symbol (in the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the super reach loss The ranges of random numbers assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the losing probability are different depending on the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio at which the variable display is actually executed in the super-reach losing variation pattern (the super-reach losing variation pattern) (Appearance rate) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the rate at which the variable display is executed in the super reach loss variation pattern varies according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, The present invention is not limited to this. Considering the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display is displayed at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed in a variation pattern.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 102 is retained for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply becomes incapable of discharging the backup power supply). You. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage unit, a second special figure reservation storage unit, a general figure reservation storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, a game control counter, and the like. A setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit are provided.

  The first special map holding storage unit stores the special map which has not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and the starting winning (first starting winning) has been generated. The game data (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the hold number in the first start winning opening and establishes the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the random number value MR1 for fluctuation display result determination, the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. The storage is performed until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure game is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display result) in this special figure game ) Is the hold information that enables determination of whether or not a big hit will be made.

  The second special map holding storage unit stores a special winning start (second starting winning) when a game ball passes (enters) a second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, but the starting has not yet started. It stores the hold data of the figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the hold number in the second starting winning opening and establishes the second starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the random number value MR1 for fluctuation display result determination, the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. It is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display result) in this special figure game ) Is the hold information that enables determination of whether or not a big hit will be made.

  It should be noted that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, the opening information indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening is included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

  The general figure holding storage unit stores the general figure holding information that has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 yet, even though the game ball passing through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure holding storage unit associates the game balls with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls passed through the pass gate, and based on the passing of the game balls, the CPU 103 extracts the general figure display result determination from the random number circuit 104 and the like. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 and the like are stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state.

  The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting a part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random number value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or an arithmetic process on all or a part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, a game control main process in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-11 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (122SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (122SGSa002). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is ON, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014. If the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa003; N), it is further determined whether or not backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (122SGSa004). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is ON. When the backup flag is OFF and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; Y), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (122SGSa005). . In 122SGSa005, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped by using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (122SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa005; Y), the CPU 103 sets an effect control board activation start waiting timer for waiting until the effect control board 12 is activated (122SGSa006). Then, the value of the effect control board activation start waiting timer is decremented by one (122SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board activation start waiting timer has expired (122SGSa008). If the effect control board activation start waiting timer has not expired (122SGSa008; N), 122SGSa007 is executed again, and waits until the effect control board 12 is activated. When the effect control board activation start waiting timer is out (122SGSa008; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa009).

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa009; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 122SG090 is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 is open (122SGSa009a). When the open sensor 122SG090 is ON (122SGSa009a; Y), a set value confirmation process for displaying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed, and the salesclerk at the game hall displays the set value. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in a state where the user can confirm the set value by visually checking the monitor 122SG029 (setting change state) (122SGSa010). When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa009; N) or when the release sensor is OFF (122SGSa009a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa011 after the execution of the set value confirmation process. That is, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the clear switch is operated without being operated, the set value is confirmed if the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened even if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. It is impossible.

  In 122SGSa011, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in a state before the power interruption, transmits a command at the time of recovery including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021. (122SGSa013).

  In 122SGSa014, the CPU 103 sets an effect control board activation start waiting timer for waiting until the effect control board 12 is activated. Then, the value of the effect control board activation start waiting timer is decremented by one (122SGSa015), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board activation start waiting timer has expired (122SGSa016). If the effect control board activation start waiting timer has not expired (122SGSa016; N), 122SGSa015 is executed again, and the operation control board 12 waits until the activation. When the effect control board activation start waiting timer is out (122SGSa016; Y), the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017) for clearing the contents of the RAM 102, and then turns the lock switch 122SG051 ON. It is determined whether or not there is (122SGSa018).

  If the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa018; N), the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by a cold start, transmits a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021 ( 122SGSa019).

  Further, when the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa019; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the release sensor 122SG090 is ON (122SGSa019a). When the open sensor is ON (122SGSa019a; Y), that is, when the gaming machine frame 3 is open, a setting change process (122SGSa020) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 And the process proceeds to 122SGSa021. That is, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the clear switch is operated and activated, the set value cannot be changed unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened even if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. ing.

  If the open sensor 122SG090 is OFF in the 122SGSa019a, it is determined that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by a cold start, a cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the process proceeds to 122SGSa021 (122SGSa019).

  In 122SGSa021, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104. Then, a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (122SGSa022), and an interrupt is permitted (122SGSa023). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 9-12 is a flowchart showing the setting value confirmation processing executed by the CPU 103. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa031), and is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 9-13 (B)). The set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa032). Then, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033). If the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033; N), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing 122SGSa033.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa051; N), the CPU 103 ends the display of the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa034) and sends a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12. Then, the setting value confirmation processing is completed (122SGSa035).

  In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the state is the same as the case of starting by a normal hot start by terminating the setting confirmation state (ending the setting value confirmation processing). The command transmitted to the effect control board 12 may be a hot start notification command.

  FIG. 9A is a flowchart illustrating the RAM clear processing executed by the CPU 103. In the RAM clear processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041). If the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041; N), it is further determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042). If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; Y), the CPU 103 specifies the second address from the top in the RAM 102 and proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa043).

  On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 by specifying the top address in the RAM 102 (122SGSa044).

  In 122SGSa045, the CPU 103 sets (stores) “00H” at the designated address. In particular, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), "00H" is set to the address F000, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 automatically sets the set value. 1 is set. Then, it is determined whether or not the specified address is the last address (FXXX described later) of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046). If the specified address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is specified and the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa047), and if the specified address is the last address of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046). ; Y) ends the RAM clearing process.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to each storage area of the RAM 102 in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment. Of these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 is described later. The temporary setting value is stored. Further, other addresses (F002, F003, etc.) include clear switch backup information that can specify whether or not the clear switch was ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started, as well as special figure storage and general figure storage. Game information including storage, values of various counters, various timers, various flags, and error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among other areas in which other information is stored. In addition, a value (for example, a set value “0”) indicating a factory shipping state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started while the value indicating the factory shipping state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, The pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process may be prompted to be restarted by a display on the display device 5 or the like.

  In other words, the RAM clear processing in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment means that if there is no abnormality in the RAM 102 and there is backup data, the addresses (F001 to FXXX) except the address (F000) where the set value is stored are stored. ) Stores “00H” in the RAM 102 to clear data other than the set value, but when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 or when there is no backup data, “00H” is stored in all the addresses (F000 to FXXX) in the RAM 102. Is a process of clearing all the data including the set value by storing.

  In the feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, the set value is stored in the first address F000 of the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102. Is also good. When the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102 as described above, when executing the RAM clear processing shown in FIG. 9A, the address immediately before the last address of the RAM 102 is used as the address for clearing the data. , And "00H" may be stored sequentially from the address F000 to the address immediately before.

  Further, in the feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, an example is described in which data other than the set value in the RAM 102 is cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, only the game information stored at a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment) is cleared. It may be.

  Further, in the feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, the form in which the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. A process of storing or reading clear switch backup information in the RAM 102 by storing it in a register of the microcomputer 100 (for example, any of an accumulator that is the center of operation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, and a general-purpose register). May be omitted, and the processing load on the CPU 103 may be reduced. When the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the clear switch backup information is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent other information (data) from being overwritten by the processing.

  FIG. 9-14 is a flowchart illustrating the setting change process executed by the CPU 103. In the setting change processing, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). The set value change start notification command may be transmitted immediately before the start of the set value change process (at the timing when the lock switch 122SG051 is determined to be ON in 122SGSa018). Then, the setting value stored in the address F000 (see FIG. 9-13 (B)) in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified setting value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa053).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting switch 122SG052 has been operated (122SGSa054). When the setting switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “1”, “2”, which is a setting value that is one step more advantageous for the player than “1”, is set as a temporary setting value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “2”, “3” which is one step more advantageous for the player than “2” is temporarily set. It is stored as a set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored as a temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the RAM 102 at the address F001 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). If the setting switch is not operated in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the process of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processes of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 122SGSa054 to 122SGSa056 to store a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or stores it in the address F001. A process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

  When the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 stores the set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 in the address F000. That is, the CPU 103 stores the set value stored at the address F001 (the provisional set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029) at the address F000, thereby changing the set value stored at the address F001 to the actual set value. (Change the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1). Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value designation command corresponding to the setting value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102 and a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12, and ends the setting change process. (122SGSa059, 122SGSa060).

  In the characteristic section 122SG of the present embodiment, the mode in which the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the setting change processing is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the set value change end notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 within the game control main process (immediately after the end of the setting change process).

  In the characteristic section 122SG of this embodiment, a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by turning off the lock switch 122SG051 (the provisional set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102). Is stored in the address F000), but the present invention is not limited to this. The game ball can be placed in the starting winning opening, the clear switch can be operated, the lock switch 122SG051 can be pushed, and the like. By executing the operation described above, the lock switch 122SG051 may be turned off, so that a new set value may be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start or started in a setting change state, a cold start notification command or a set value change start is issued to the effect control board 12. Although the form in which the RAM clear processing is executed before the notification command is transmitted is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be executed after transmitting the command or the setting value change start notification command.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the RAM clear processing is executed before the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and executes the RAM clearing process again after the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed (other than the set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102). May be cleared). By doing so, it is possible to prevent such a problem that a game is started while illegal data is stored in the RAM.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the common RAM clearing process (122SGSa017) is executed after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a setting change state. Although a mode according to the state (a cold start notification command, a setting value change start notification command, or a setting value change end notification command) is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the present invention is not limited to this. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a setting change state, a command (a cold start notification command, a setting value change start notification command, a setting value change Common RAM clear after sending the end notification command) to the effect control board 12 It may perform the physical.

  Next, a game control timer interrupt process in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-15, in the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (122SGS020), and then executes processes from a switch process (S21) to a command control process (S27). . As shown in FIGS. 9 to 16, in the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value from a power supply board (not shown). Is determined (122SGSa051). If there is no input of the power-off signal (122SGSa051; N), the process is terminated. (122SGS053), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 102 (122SGS053). Then, after creating check data to be used for restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS054), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

  Next, a description will be given of an effect control main process in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment. FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart illustrating the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (122SGS401a), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets a CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Circuit) register setting. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (122SGS401b). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

  Further, effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to a reception waiting period of a command transmitted from main board 11 (122SGS402). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by one (122SGS403), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has expired (122SGS404). If the command reception waiting timer has expired (122SGS404; N), the processes of 122SGS403 and 122SGS404 are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the command reception waiting timer expires.

  Then, when the command reception waiting timer has expired (122SGS404; Y), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hot start notification command has been received (122SGS405). When the hot start notification command is received (122SGS405; Y), that is, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (in the player information input process described later, the player After accepting the input of the information, the information (information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc.) stored in the RAM 122 is cleared, and the process proceeds to 122SGS417 (122SGS406).

  If no hot start notification command has been received (122SGS405; N), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a cold notification command has been received (122SGS407). When the cold notification command is received (122SGS407; Y), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations and the number of big hits stored in the RAM 122 since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1) , Information including the number of times of super reach, etc.) (122SGS408), and that the information stored in the RAM 102 has been cleared, and that the player information and effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. A RAM clear notification process for notification (execution of RAM clear notification) is executed (122SGS409). In the RAM clear notification process, display of an image on the image display device 5, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like are performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. It is only necessary to be able to notify the clerk or the like of the amusement arcade that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After the execution of the RAM clear notification process, the process proceeds to 122SGS417.

  If no cold start notification command has been received (122SGS407; N), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a setting value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410). When the setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, a notification that the setting value changing operation is being performed (a notification that the setting value is being changed) is issued. ) Is executed (122SGS411). Note that the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state generally means that the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is open and a clerk or the like of the game hall that changes the setting value uses the main board 11 Of the display monitor 122SG029 mounted on the camera. In other words, the setting change state is a state in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a clerk or the like of the game hall that changes the setting value. It is considered from the display of the device 5 that it is not possible to determine whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state. Therefore, as the notification during the change of the setting value, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in a setting change state by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 to the clerk of the game hall changing the setting value. You just need to be informed.

  Further, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change end notification command and the set value designation command have been received, that is, whether or not the set value of the set value has ended (122SGS412). When the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command are received (122SGS412), the setting value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the received setting value designation command (the setting stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102). The value is specified, and the specified setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 122 as setting value information (a value of “1” to “3” corresponding to the setting value) (122SG413). Then, after executing the processing of 122SGS408 and 122SGS409 described above, the process proceeds to 122SGS417. If at least one of the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command is not received (122SGS412; N), the processing of 122SGS411 and 122SGS412 is repeatedly executed.

  In the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, the form in which the RAM 122 is cleared after the execution of the notification of the change of the set value is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The RAM 122 may be cleared in parallel. If the clearing of the RAM 122 is completed during the execution of the notification of the change of the set value, the RAM clear notification may be executed in parallel with the notification of the change of the set value. Notification may be performed.

  If the set value change start notification command has not been received (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value check start notification command has been received, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting check state. It is determined whether or not it has been activated (122SGS414). If the setting value confirmation start notification command has been received (122SGS414; Y), a setting value confirmation informing process for notifying that the setting is in the confirmation state (the setting value can be confirmed from the display monitor 122SG029). Execute (122SGS415). In the notification process during the setting value confirmation, the display of an image on the image display device 5, the emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. It suffices if the setting confirmation state can be reported around the pachinko gaming machine 1. If no effect of the setting value confirmation end notification command has been received (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process of 122SGS405, and issues a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change start notification command, It waits until any of the value confirmation start notification commands is received (repeatedly executes the processing of 122SGS405, 122SGS407, 122SGS410, and 122SGS414).

  As described above, in the effect control main processing in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-18, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start or the setting change state, the player information ( While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. after receiving the input of the player information from the RAM 122, the effect information (the number of fluctuations since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of big hits, The super-reach count, etc.) and set value information (any numerical value of “1” to “3” corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is set to the setting value information already stored in the RAM 122. The data is overwritten (updated).

  That is, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting confirmation state, or a setting change state.

  In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state. Illustrates a form in which the player information and the production information are not cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, The player information and the production information may be cleared.

  Returning to FIG. 9-17, in 122SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and displays the image. The display of the initial symbol corresponding to the received command is started in the device 5. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-19, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is not set, the display of the decorative symbol is started on the image display device 5 as a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as an initial symbol. When the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "from the left as an initial symbol is displayed on the image display device 5. The display of the decorative symbol is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

  In the characteristic section 122SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, “4”, “5” from the left as initial symbols are displayed on the image display device 5. "," 6 ", the display of the decorative symbol is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. When set, the decorative pattern is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial pattern at a higher rate than when the setting value (for example, "3") disadvantageous to the player is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to indicate that a set value that is advantageous to the player is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

  In the characteristic section 122SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, “4”, “5” from the left as initial symbols are displayed on the image display device 5. "," 6 ", the display of the decorative symbol is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different between the case where the setting is set and the case where the setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, “3”) is set. In addition, when the setting value (for example, “1”) that is advantageous to the player is set, and when the setting value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, “3”) is set, the speakers 8L and 8R output The volume of the output sound, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be varied.

  Returning to FIG. 9-17, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” to the look-ahead restriction counter in order to regulate the execution of the prefetch notice effect in the first four fluctuations (122SGS418). Thereafter, effect control CPU 120 shifts to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (122SGS419). When a timer interrupt occurs, effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt processing. If the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (122SGS420) and executes the following processing.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes a startup notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (122SGS421). In the start notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interrupt is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If this is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined which of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value confirmation end notification command has been received. A start notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and a start notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. After the start-up notification process timer is started, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started based on the value of the start-up notification process timer and the start-up notification process table by executing the start-up notification process in the next and subsequent interrupts. The notification may be executed.

  In the characteristic section 122SG in the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, or a setting value confirmation end notification command. The state of the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different depending on whether there is any.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, a hot start notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received, that is, a new pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. When the set value is not set, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed. The timing at which the game effect lamp 9 starts emitting light for 60 seconds and the timing at which the output sound A starts from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds are the same. The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  Further, when the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when a new set value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. , The light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  In other words, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or a setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 causes the gaming effect lamp 9 to emit light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R to emit light for 30 seconds. Output of the output sound A, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputs the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Performing the output of B includes both.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated and receives a setting value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming effect Light emission of the lamp 9 for 40 seconds, output of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and display of a message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5 (for example, a message image indicating that the change of the set value has been completed) Execute It should be noted that the emission start timing of the gaming effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The emission start timing of the gaming effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

  In particular, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the setting value change end notification command is received. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received. Unlike the above, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

  In other words, the special control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, the effect control CPU 120 causes the gaming effect lamp 9 to emit light for 40 seconds and output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds. C, and display of a message image on the image display device 5 for 40 seconds.

  As described above, the timing at which the game effect lamp 9 starts to emit light, the timing at which sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R starts, and the timing at which image display is started on the image display device 5 are the same. Regarding the notification mode when the machine 1 is started, the notification period when the hot start notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start) is 60 seconds, and the cold start notification command is issued. When the notification is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start), the notification period is 60 seconds, and when the set value change end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state). The period is 40 seconds.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, an example is described in which the start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is executed using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management computer such as a management computer of a game arcade or a counter of each unit, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. As a start notification at the time of the start, a signal that can specify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of the hot start, the cold start, the setting change state, and the setting confirmation state, a device for executing the start notification is partially common. Although a certain form (in which light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. A device that performs start notification differs depending on whether the device is started in a start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, a signal is output from the above-mentioned external output terminal to the management device. It may be, or the like) that.

  Further, the notification mode of each device that executes the start notification may be made different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are turned on, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state. In this case, only some of the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may emit light.

  Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is open, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko gaming machine 1). When three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some of the speakers). Since there are many cases, sound output from all speakers 8L and 8R may be performed. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as “setting is being changed,” while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or the RAM 122 has been cleared, such as “RAM cleared”, may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  Further, in the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of the above-described external output terminals, the terminals that output signals to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the change of the setting value is completed (the time until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value designation command is received) is used as the setting value change notification. During the period, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the setting change to the management device, and after the change of the set value is completed, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear to the management device as the RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear to the management device as the RAM clear notification.

  When the external output terminal is used commonly for each notification, the timing of outputting a signal to the management device may be made different according to each notification.

  As described above, in the start-up notification processing, the form in which the start-up notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different according to the received command is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 May be executed in one notification mode regardless of the received command. In addition, the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 exemplifies a mode in which the start notification is performed even when any of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, and a set value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this. Among the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command, the pachinko gaming machine 1 A command that does not execute the start notification may be provided.

  In addition, in feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, as an initializing effect in the present invention, a start notification in a different mode is executed according to a command received when pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or pachinko gaming machine 1 Is displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the command received when the is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The mode of the start notification and the combination of the decorative symbols may be all different according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or only a part of them may be the same.

  Further, in feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, when pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, started in a cold start, started in a setting change state, or started in a setting confirmation state, Also, the present invention is not limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May not be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 9-17, next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a power-off detection process (122 SGS422). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIGS. 9 to 22, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a power-off signal from a power supply board (not shown) indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not (122SGS431). If there is no input of the power-off signal (122SGS431; N), the processing is terminated, and if there is an input of the power-off signal (122SGS431; Y), the setting value information and the player information stored in the RAM 122 are deleted. The backup data to be included is specified (122SGS432), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (122SGS433). Then, after creating check data to be used for restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS434), the processing shifts to a loop processing in which none of the processing is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

  Returning to FIG. 9-17, next, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 122SGS423). In this command analysis processing, effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 9C) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 performs an effect control process (122SGS424). In the effect control process process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

  Next, an effect random number update process (122SGS425) for updating the count value of a counter for generating an effect random number such as a big hit symbol determination random number, a player information input process for accepting input of player information (122SGS426), A player information output process of outputting player information (122SGS427), and a production information totaling process of totaling production information (122SGS428) are executed. Then, the process proceeds to S52.

  In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player to change the password (the password generated by an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance). The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and can receive the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of large hits, the number of super reach, and the like as player information stored each time the fluctuation display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed.

  In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player, and generates the two-dimensional code. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a portable terminal such as a smartphone, and transmits the player information totalized in the current game to an external server. 1 can be stored in the server.

  In the effect information totaling process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, and the like stored in the RAM 122 as effect information each time a variable display, a big hit game, or a super reach is executed. I do.

  Next, a description will be given of the effect control process processing in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 9-22, in the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is “0” (122SGS441). When the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is “0” (122SGS441; Y), after executing the look-ahead notice setting process (S161), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is performed according to the effect control process flag. Perform the above processing.

  When the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is any one of “1” to “4” (122SGS441; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (122SGS442). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is “0” or any one of “2” to “7” (122SGS442; N), one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag. When the processing is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (122SGS442; Y), the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is decremented by 1 (122SGS443), and S170 to S177 (S170 to S177) are performed according to the effect control process flag. (See FIG. 7). By executing the processes of 122SGS441 to 122SGS443 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after startup, the execution of the prefetch notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

  In the characteristic portion 122SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby displaying the variable display four times. Although the form in which the execution of the prefetch notice effect is restricted is illustrated as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. 5), the execution of the prefetch notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

  In addition, in feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, regardless of whether pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start or in a setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is related to the progress of the game based on the fact that the game has become possible. As a setting, the form in which the execution of the prefetch notice effect is restricted over four variable displays is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of whether the game has been started in the changed state, based on the fact that the game has become possible, the settings relating to the progress of the game are set according to the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the RTC. The setting of the effect and the like may be set to the state at the time of factory shipment.

  As described above, in pachinko gaming machine 1 in feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8H, effect control CPU 120 determines whether super reach A or super reach B is the first suggestion effect. The reach effect and the reach effect of super reach C or super reach D as the second suggestion effect can be executed, and when the reach effect of super reach C or super reach D is executed, the super reach C And the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach production of Super Reach C and Super Reach D is notified from the start of the reach production of Super Reach D, and the notification of the title 31AK007 according to the reach production can be executed. Can be improved.

Further, the present embodiment also includes the following invention 122SG. That is, as the conventional pachinko gaming machines, there are, for example, those described in JP-A-2016-42880 and those described in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is powered on and started (power supply to the gaming machine is started. ), A command (control information) output from the main board to the effect control board (effect control means) in order to restore the gaming machine based on the memory in which the main board (game control board) is backed up. And a command output from the main board to the effect control board to clear the backed-up memory regardless of the memory in which the main board is backed up, and a state in which the set value of the gaming machine can be changed When the command output from the main board to the effect control board is the same, when the game machine is powered on and activated, the effect control board is Making it impossible perform appropriate processing according to the movement state. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the invention 122SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process shown in FIG. 9-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part) and
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes a process control process shown in FIG. 5) Part) and
A backup storage unit (for example, the RAM 102) capable of holding the stored content for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 clears the RAM shown in FIGS. 9-17) that can control the effect based on the control information (for example, the effect control command shown in FIG. 9-3) output from the game control means. A notification process, a notification process during a setting value change, a notification process during a setting value check, etc.),
With
After the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the game control means sets a startup state when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and restores the first startup based on the storage content stored in the backup storage means. State (for example, hot start), a second activation state (for example, cold start) for erasing and restoring the stored contents regardless of the stored contents stored in the backup storage means, and setting by the setting means is possible. , And outputs different control information corresponding to the activated state to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-14). When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, the CPU 103 transmits a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and the pachinko gaming machine When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start mode, the CPU 103 transmits a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12. The part that sends the setting value change start notification command)
According to this feature, the effect control means can execute an appropriate process according to the activation state of the game control means when the power supply is started. .

Further, as means 2 of invention 122SG,
An effect control storage means (for example, a RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means;
The information to be erased among the information stored in the effect control storage means differs between the case where the activation state corresponding to the control information is the second activation state and the case where the third activation state. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-18, the information cleared from the RAM 102 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting confirmation state, or a setting change state.
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform appropriate erasure according to the activation state.

Further, as means 3 of invention 122SG,
The game control means can output control information (for example, a set value change end notification command) for designating the end of the third activation state,
The effect control means performs special control according to the end of the third activation state based on the output of the control information designating the termination of the third activation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20). As described above, based on the reception of the set value change end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds and outputs the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the startup notification process. Then, the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed).
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the third activation state in which the set value can be set has ended by the special control.

Further, as means 4 of invention 122SG,
When the control information corresponding to the first activation state or the second activation state is output, the effect control means performs specific control according to the output (for example, as shown in FIGS. Based on the reception of the start notification command and the cold start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the startup notification process.
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize by a specific control that a starting state in which a set value cannot be set is provided.

Further, as means 5 of the invention 122SG,
The effect control means performs different control depending on the activation state corresponding to the control information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-20, based on the reception of the hot start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 In the start-up notification process, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the portion for executing the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R and the reception of the cold start notification command. In the start-up notification processing, a portion for executing the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputting the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and for receiving the setting value change end notification command, The CPU 120 emits light for 40 seconds from the game effect lamp 9 and 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the startup notification process. A part for outputting the output sound C and executing a message image for 40 seconds in the image display device 5. Also, as shown in Fig. 9-19, based on the reception of the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command, The decorative symbol is displayed as a combination of "1", "2", and "3" as the initial symbol, and the decorative symbol is set to "4" or "5" as the initial symbol based on the reception of the set value change end notification command. , "6")
A gaming machine characterized by the following is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize which activation state is in effect.

Further, as means 6 of the invention 122SG,
When the set value is changed in the third activation state, the game control unit deletes the backup information stored in the backup storage unit except for the specific information (for example, the modified example 122SG-1). As shown in FIG. 9-23, the RAM clear processing is executed based on the change of the set value, and the data after the address F001 except the data of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is cleared. part)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to execute appropriate erasure of backup information according to a change in a set value.

Further, as means 7 of the invention 122SG,
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game,
The timing at which at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means is erased differs between the first activation state and the second activation state (for example, as shown in a modified example 122SG-4, a pachinko machine). When the gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the RAM clearing process is executed at a timing before the cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, , RAM clear processing is executed at the timing after the setting value change start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to execute erasing of game information at an appropriate timing according to an activation state.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 123SG. That is, as the conventional pachinko gaming machines, there are, for example, those described in JP-A-2016-42880 and those described in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is powered on and started (power supply to the gaming machine is started. And when the main board is backed up regardless of the backed up storage (general startup state) and when the set value of the gaming machine can be changed (set startup state) If the notification mode is the same, there is a problem that it is difficult to identify whether the gaming machine is in the general activation state or the setting activation state, and it is difficult to detect an illegal setting change or the like of the gaming machine. Was. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of Means 1 of Invention 123SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process shown in FIG. 9-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part) and
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes a process control process shown in FIG. 5) Part) and
Backup storage means (for example, the RAM 102 or the RAM 122) capable of holding the stored contents for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Start-up notifying means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the start-up notifying process shown in FIGS. 9-17) capable of notifying the start-up state of the game control means when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
With
The game control means includes, as the start state, a general start state (for example, a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start) in which the storage contents stored in the backup storage means are cleared and started, and A setting activation state (for example, a setting change state) for validating the setting,
The start notification unit performs the notification in a different manner between the general start state and the set start state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start). When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up in a setting change state, the light emission of the game effect lamp and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are performed. A part for displaying a message image on the display device 5)
According to this feature, it is possible to easily specify whether the activation state is the general activation state or the setting activation state, and thus it is possible to easily find an illegality due to the setting. .

Further, as means 2 of invention 123SG,
The start notification unit can execute various types of notification according to the priority,
The priority of the notification of the setting activation state is higher than the priority of the notification of the general activation state (for example, as shown in Modification 122SG-5, during the execution of the high priority setting value change notification, A part to prevent low priority RAM clear notification from being executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the notification of the setting activation state is prioritized, so that it is possible to prevent the illegal operation due to the setting from being discovered.

Further, as means 3 of invention 123SG,
The start notifying unit notifies the set start state and the general start state in different notification periods (for example, the notification period when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start is 60 seconds, the pachinko gaming machine 1 (A part in which the notification period when the device is started in the setting change state is 40 seconds). .

Furthermore, as means 4 of invention 123SG,
The activation notifying means,
A first notification unit (for example, the image display device 5), and a second notification unit (for example, the game effect lamp 9 and the speakers 8L and 8R) different from the first notification unit,
The setting start state is notified by the first notification means (for example, a part displaying a message image on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-20),
The general start-up state is notified by the second notification means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-20, a portion that executes light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R). According to this feature, the start notification is executed by different notification means, so that it is easy to recognize which start state is in effect.

Further, as means 5 of invention 123SG,
The game control means includes a game control by a common setting as a setting related to a game progress in a game possible state after the setting start state and a game possible state after the general start state. A game in which the CPU 103 does not execute the start winning determination process after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, and thereby, it is possible to execute the prefetch notice effect up to four times of fluctuation display). According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience, such as the fact that the setting change has been recognized by executing the game control with different settings.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 124SG. That is, conventionally, as a gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-137351. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-137351, if the game information is unintentionally erased due to a change in the set value, the gaming machine or the game machine in which the gaming machine is installed may be lost. There is a risk of giving a disadvantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the invention 124SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process shown in FIG. 9-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part) and
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes a process control process shown in FIG. 5) Part) and
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game,
Notification means capable of notifying in advance that the game information stored in the game information storage means is to be deleted (for example, a part where effect control CPU 120 executes a set value change confirmation notification process in Modification 122SG-1). When,
With
The game control means deletes at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means when a new set value is set by the setting means (for example, when the CPU 103 has the modification 122SG-1). A part for executing the RAM clear processing shown in FIG.
The predetermined operation includes a setting change start operation (for example, an operation of turning on a clear switch), a setting change operation (for example, an operation of turning on a setting changeover switch 122SG052), and a setting change completion operation (for example, turning off a lock switch 122SG051). Operation) and
The setting unit can perform the setting change operation by performing the setting change start operation (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 9-23 as the modified example 122SG-1, the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON. After the determination (122SGSa054a; Y), the part in which the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 can be executed), and the setting change completion operation is performed after the enabled setting change operation. (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modified example 122SG-1), the CPU 103 determines that the lock switch is OFF (122SGSa057; N), and then executes the process of 122SGSa058. ),
The notification unit executes the notification when the setting change start operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-24 as a modification 122SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 starts the first setting value change start). (A part that executes a setting value change confirmation notification process based on the determination that the notification command has been received (122SGS410; Y))
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gaming information from being unintentionally erased due to a change in the set value.

Further, as means 2 of invention 124SG,
The game control means, after the setting change start operation is performed, if the setting change completion operation is performed without performing the setting change operation, the game information stored in the game information storage means If the lock switch 122SG051 is not turned off after the CPU 103 determines that the setting changeover switch has not been operated (122SGSa054d; N), as shown in FIG. If it is determined, based on the fact that the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), the set value change process is terminated without executing the RAM clear process (122SGSa060). Part)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a player from being disadvantaged by erasing game information even though a set value is not changed. be able to.

Further, as means 3 of invention 124SG,
The notifying unit can notify that the game information is not deleted by the game control unit when the predetermined operation is completed without performing the setting change completion operation (for example, as a modified example 122SG-1). As shown in FIG. 9-25, a portion where message image 122 SG005M1 is displayed on image display device 5 when effect control CPU 120 executes the set value change confirmation notifying process.
According to this feature, the gaming machine is characterized in that the operator can recognize an operation method for preventing the gaming information from being erased, so that the gaming information is not intended. Erasing can be further prevented.

Further, as means 4 of the invention 124SG,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the erasure condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined confirmation operation is performed, the game control means stores the game information stored in the game information storage means. After erasing at least a part of the information (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON in the game control main process (122SGSa003; Y), and then executes the RAM clear process (122SGSa017). Part),
The notification unit also performs the notification even when the erasing condition is satisfied (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 9-26 as a modified example 122SG-2, a message image 122SG005M2 is displayed on the image display device 5). part)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent game information from being erased unintentionally.

Further, as means 5 of the invention 124SG,
Effect control means (eg, effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling effects based on control information output from the game control means;
Effect control storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means;
Selecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of selecting whether or not to execute erasure in the effect control storage means;
With
When the erasure condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and when it is selected by the selection means not to execute the erasure in the effect control storage means, the game information storage is performed. At least a portion of the game information stored in the means is erased (for example, as shown in a modified example 122SG-3, only the RAM 102 is cleared), and the erasing condition is set when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Is satisfied, and when it is selected by the selection means to execute the erasure in the effect control storage means, at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means is erased. And at least part of the information stored in the effect control storage means is erased (for example, as shown in Modification 122SG-3, RAM1 Part to clear both the 2 and RAM122)
According to this feature, when the erasure condition is satisfied, whether or not to erase the effect control storage means together with the erasure in the game information storage means is described. Can be selected.

  As described above, the characteristic portion 122SG according to the embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings. This is also included in the present invention.

  For example, in the characteristic part 122SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the clear switch is ON at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, after executing the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017), the lock switch is executed. When the 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa018; Y), the setting change process (122SGSa020) is executed, and an example in which a new set value can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, if the clear switch is ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, it is first determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. If the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, the setting change process is performed. RAM clear processing is executed based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be.

  As described above, when the RAM clearing process is executed based on the setting of the new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change process, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as the modified example 122SG-1, In the setting change processing, the CPU 103 first transmits a first setting value change times notification command indicating that the CPU 103 has started executing the setting change processing to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). Next, the setting value stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified setting value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a). If the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa054a; N), the CPU 103 further determines whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054a; N). 122SGSa054b). If the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054b; Y), the processes of 122SGSa054a and 122SGSa054b are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the clear switch is turned ON or the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF. If the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF, a setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the setting change process ends (122SGS061).

  When the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a; Y), the CPU 103 issues a second setting value change start notification command indicating that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa054c), and it is determined whether or not the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d).

  When the setting switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d; Y), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “1”, “2”, which is a setting value that is one step more advantageous for the player than “1”, is set as a temporary setting value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “2”, “3” which is one step more advantageous for the player than “2” is temporarily set. It is stored as a set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored as a temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the RAM 102 at the address F001 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). If the setting switch is not operated in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the process of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processes of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 to store a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or stores it in the address F001. A process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

  When the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a). If the setting value (temporary setting value) is not stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102, that is, if the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off without operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052, a setting value change end notification command is produced. The setting is transmitted to the control board 12 and the setting change process ends (122SGS061).

  On the other hand, when the set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a; Y), the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the set value stored in the address F001 are used. (122SGSa057b), and it is determined whether the same setting value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c). If the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), that is, if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been changed, a set value change end notification command is issued. The data is transmitted to the board 12 and the setting change process ends (122SGS061).

  Further, when different setting values are stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; N), that is, when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, it is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102. The set value is stored in the address F000, that is, the set value stored in the address F001 is stored as the main set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (122SGSa058).

  Then, a setting value designation command corresponding to the setting value (the newly set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1) stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa059), and the RAM is cleared. The processing is executed (122SGSa060). Note that the RAM clear processing (122SGSa060) executes the same processing as the RAM clear processing described with reference to FIG. 9-13, and excludes the set values stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 (stored after the address F001). Clear data). After execution of the RAM clear processing (122SGSa060), a setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the setting change processing is ended (122SGS061).

  FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart illustrating a part of the effect control main process in Modification Example 122SG-1. In the effect control main process in the modification 122SG-1, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the cold start notification command has not been received (122SGS407; N), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a start notification command has been received (122SGS410a). If the first setting value change start notification command has not been received (122SGS410a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17). If the first setting value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410a; Y), By executing a setting value change confirmation notification process (122SGS410b), the game information or the like stored in the RAM 102 is cleared by changing the setting value on the image display device 5, or the lock is set when the setting value is not changed. An instruction to turn off the switch 122SG051 is displayed as a message image 122SG005M1 (see FIG. 9-25 (A)).

  Then, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second setting value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410c). If the second set value change start notification command has not been received (122SGS410C; N), it is further determined whether or not the set value change end notification command has been received (122SGS410d). If the setting value change end notification command has not been received (122SGS410d; N), the processing of 122SGS410b to 122SGS410d is repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the first setting value change start notification command or the setting value change end notification command is received. If the setting value change end notification command has been received (122SGS410d; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17).

  Further, when the second setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410c; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting value changing notification process for notifying that the setting value changing operation is being performed. (122SGS411), it is determined whether or not a setting value change end notification command has been received (122SGS411a). If the setting value change end notification command has not been received (122SGS411a; N), the processes of 122SG411 and 122SGS411a are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the setting value change end notification command is received. Then, when the setting value change end notification command is received (122SGS411a; Y), it is determined whether or not the setting value designation command is received (122SGS411b). If the setting value designation command has not been received (122SGS411b; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17). If the setting value designation command has been received (122SGS411b; Y), the process proceeds from the received setting value designation command. A set value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102) is specified, and the specified set value is set value information (“1” to “3” corresponding to the set value). Is updated and stored in the RAM 122 (122SG413). Then, the process proceeds to 122SGS408 (see FIG. 9-17).

  As described above, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process, and the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine is operated in a state where the clerk of the game arcade turns on the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051. When the device 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (A), the game display information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared by changing the set value in the image display device 5, or the set value is changed. If not, an instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1.

  When the clerk of the game hall or the like turns off the lock switch 122SG051 while the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 as described above, as shown in FIG. Are not changed and the RAM 102 is not cleared, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of "1", "2", and "3". On the other hand, when the clerk of the game arcade turns on the clear switch again while the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (C), the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is in a setting change state, and the display of the image on the image display device 5, the emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like inform that the setting value is being changed.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off without setting a new setting value by the clerk of the game hall or the like in the setting change state, or when the clerk of the game hall sets the new setting value to the same value as the original setting value. When the set value is set and the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off, as shown in FIG. 9D, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed and the RAM 102 is cleared. Instead, a decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of “1”, “2”, and “3”. Further, in the setting change state, when a store clerk at the game hall or the like sets a new set value (changes the set value) and turns off the lock switch 122SG051, the set value is changed as shown in FIG. Is changed, the RAM 102 is cleared, and a decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as an initial symbol.

  In the modified example 122SG-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 activates the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned ON, thereby changing the set value on the image display device 5. The example in which the game information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the set value is not changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. The present invention is not limited to this, and as illustrated in FIG. 9-26 as a modified example 122SG-2, image display is performed by activating the pachinko gaming machine 1 with a clearing switch turned on by a store clerk or the like at a game arcade. The game information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared by starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a cold start in the device 5. That and that, if it does not start a pachinko game machine 1 at cold start an instruction to reboot the pachinko gaming machine 1, may be displayed as a message image 122SG005M2.

  By doing so, for example, when a clerk at a game arcade or the like accidentally turns on the clear switch to start the pachinko gaming machine 1 by hot start, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up at a cold start. This prevents the game information stored in the RAM 102 from being unintentionally cleared.

  In the modified examples 122SG-1 and 122SG-2, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state or started in a cold start, the message image 122SG005M1 or the message image 122SG005M2 is displayed on the image display device 5. Is displayed to confirm whether or not to clear the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM 102 is cleared by displaying a message image on the image display device 5. Whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state and / or started by cold start may be confirmed.

  In the modified example 122SG-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 activates the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned ON, thereby changing the set value on the image display device 5. The example in which the game information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the set value is not changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. If the setting value is changed in the image display device 5 or the RAM 102 is cleared, A message image 122SG005M3 including a choice of whether to clear the RAM 122 in response to the change of the fixed value or the clearing of the RAM 102 is displayed, and the RAM 122 is cleared by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. The selection of whether or not may be accepted.

  When clearing of the RAM 122 is selected by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the effect control CPU 120 executes the RAM clearing process to clear other information except for the set value information in the RAM 122 (results). If the clear of the RAM 122 is not selected by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the RAM 122 is not cleared (as a result, only the RAM 102 is cleared).

  Further, in the characteristic part 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the same timing (the cold start notification command or the setting command for the effect control Although the form in which the RAM clear processing is executed at the timing before transmitting the value change start notification command) has been described as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. Is started by a cold start, the RAM clear processing is executed at a timing before the cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the effect control is performed. Timing after transmitting the setting value change start notification command to the board 12 (more specifically, When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, for example, by executing a RAM clearing process after transmitting the set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12, that is, after the end of the set value change. The timing for clearing the RAM 102 may be different between the case where the RAM 102 is started in the setting change state.

  Further, in the feature section 122SG in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 are always cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a setting change state. Although the form in which the RAM clear notification process is executed to notify the fact (perform the RAM clear notification) is described as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. When the machine 1 is started in the setting change state to notify that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed (to execute the notification during the change of the set value), each notification such as not executing the RAM clear notification is performed. , And when a high-priority notification (for example, notification of a change in the set value) is being performed, a low-priority notification (for example, a RAM clear notification) is issued. It may not be line.

  In the case where a priority is provided for each notification as described above, a low-priority notification may be executed after the execution of the high-priority notification. In this case, the low-priority notification is executed in a shorter period than when the high-priority notification is not executed, so that the period for executing the notification is prevented from becoming long. You may.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the setting for the movable body 32 is not performed at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starting of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. At the time, a confirmation operation of whether or not the movable body 32 operates normally may be executed in parallel with the above-described notification of RAM clear, notification of change of set value, notification of confirmation of set value, and various types of startup notifications. . In the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or a cold start, a start notification for 60 seconds is executed, so that the operation of confirming the movable body 32 can be executed during the start notification. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the set value is changed in addition to the start notification for 40 seconds, the movable body 32 is changed during the change of these set values and during the start notification for 40 seconds. Can be performed.

  The operation of checking the movable body 32 may be performed from the time the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, regardless of the activation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, The effect control CPU 120 (effect control board 12) may execute the set value change start notification command, the set value change end notification command, the set value confirmation start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the like from the time when the effect control CPU 120 (effect control board 12) receives the command. Furthermore, in the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the checking operation of the movable body 32 from the point of receiving the set value change start notification command, that is, executes the checking operation of the movable body 32 while changing the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, even if an error occurs in the confirmation operation, the execution of the notification during the change of the set value is prioritized, and the error notification of the confirmation operation may not be executed.

  Further, in the feature section 122SG of the embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that the new setting value is directly reflected in the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once restarted (pachinko gaming). The new setting value may be reflected in the game by activating the machine 1 by a hot start). When the new setting value is reflected in the game by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1 as described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, the movable body 32 is checked. After slightly moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position, the confirmation operation that can be executed in a relatively short period of time, such as moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again, is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is restarted, a check that requires a relatively long period of time, such as moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position and then moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again, as a confirmation operation of the movable body 32, is performed. The operation may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the period required for the operation of checking the movable body 32 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the embodiment, the set value stored in the address F000 is disclosed as the specific information that is not cleared from the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the clear value is not cleared from the RAM 102. Specific information that is not performed may include RTC settings, error history, and the like.

  Furthermore, in the characteristic part 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the set value as the specific information that is not cleared in the RAM 102, the temporary set value, the game information, and the like as the information that is cleared is stored is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100, one RAM stores specific information such as set values that are not cleared, and the other RAM stores provisional set values and game information. Information to be cleared such as information may be stored. By doing so, the RAM (temporary set values, game information, and the like) on the other side is stored depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. (RAM) is cleared. Further, an area for storing specific information that is not cleared and an area for storing information that is cleared may be provided in the RAM 102.

  When two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100 as described above, a RAM (Static Random Access Memory) connected to a backup battery is connected to a RAM for storing uncleared specific information such as set values. On the other hand, by setting the RAM in which the temporary setting values and game information are stored as FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory), data having higher importance than other data such as setting values can be surely cleared. Alternatively, the information may be stored without being stored.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the clear switch is mounted on the power supply board is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be mounted on. By doing so, there is no need to attach a new clear switch to the existing power supply board, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the characteristic portion 122SG, the mode in which the display monitor 122SG029 for displaying the set value is mounted on the main board 11 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. A display monitor 122SG029 may be provided at a position near the setting changeover switch 122SG052 in 11 to make it easy to execute a setting value changing operation.

  Further, in the feature section 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the display monitor 122SG029 for displaying the set value on the main board 11 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game is not limited to this. When it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the machine 1, the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

  Further, in the characteristic part 122SG in the above-described embodiment, an example is described in which the display monitor 122SG029 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 are provided on the main board 11 so that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed using a monitor (7-segment monitor) mounted on the payout control board, a reset button, or the like.

  Also, in the characteristic section 122SG in the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. Since the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017) is executed, both the set value change start notification command and the cold start notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the setting value 1 is set to the most advantageous setting value for the player, and the setting value 3 is set to the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (the setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous for the game place). The setting value 3 is set to be the most advantageous setting value for the game hall), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous to the player. The set value may be set as the set value 3 and the set value most advantageous to the player.

  In particular, in the feature section 122SG, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), “00H” is set to the address F000, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is a state in which the set value 1 is automatically set, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes the most advantageous state for the player. For this reason, some players may cause the pachinko gaming machine 1 to improperly set the value 1 to the pachinko gaming machine 1 by causing the CPU 103 to execute the RAM clearing process (see FIG. 9A) after causing an abnormality in the RAM 102 or the like. It is assumed to be set. Therefore, as described above, by setting the setting value 1 to the most disadvantageous setting value for the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute the game based on the fact that the CPU 103 executes the RAM clearing process when the RAM 102 has an abnormality or the like. It is possible to prevent a situation that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the above embodiment, the special control and the specific control executed by the effect control CPU 120 perform the lighting period of the game effect lamp 9, the sound and the output period output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image. Although the form in which the image is displayed on the display device 5 or the like is different (the control relating to the notification at the time of starting is different) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the control related to the above-described notification at the time of startup, an initial symbol (see FIGS. 9-19), a background image, and a character displayed on the image display device 5 after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where a game can be played. (For example, the production mode and the production state after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ready to play) are different, and the movable body 32 is checked. Whether to execute the work, aspects and execution period of the confirmation operations may include control surrounding confirmation operation, such as different. In other words, the special control and the specific control in the present invention may be any control as long as at least a part of the control target of the effect control CPU 120, the control mode of the effect control CPU 120, the control period of the effect control CPU 120, and the like is different. .

  Further, in the feature section 122SG in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. Can be started, and a variable display result is derived on an image display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each of which is identifiable. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which a prize can be generated according to the result.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the embodiment, a message such as “Setting is being changed” is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the effect control CPU 120 determining that the setting value change start notification command has been received. Thus, the effect of the setting change is notified by the effect control CPU 120, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these notifications are transmitted to the main board 11 (CPU 103). May be executed. In this case, a signal capable of specifying that the main board 11 is changing the setting is sent to an external management device such as a computer for managing a hole, for example, as information. Notification may be made to an external device by outputting from the terminal board, and further, the main board 11 (CPU 103) is connected to the main board 11. By controlling the display and lighting conditions such as indicators and lamps, it may be recognizable informed externally that is being set changes. For example, all the indicators and lamps connected to the main board 11 may be turned on. In order to distinguish between a setting change and other states (playable state), it is preferable to cause a display, a lamp, or the like connected to the main board 11 to emit light in a mode different from that during a normal game. .

  The main board 11 (CPU 103) outputs a signal to the outside to notify not only when the setting is being changed but also when the setting is being checked, or when the main board 11 is connected to the main board 11. By controlling the display and the lighting state of the display and the lamp etc. which are present, the fact that the setting is being confirmed may be notified from the outside in a recognizable manner.

  As described above, the main board 11 (CPU 103) executes the notification, so that, for example, even for a model without the image display device 5, for example, a model such as a drum machine, the setting is being changed or the setting is confirmed. Inside can be recognized from outside.

  When the main board 11 (CPU 103) executes the notification, a dedicated lamp or LED for notifying that the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked may be provided. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B connected to the main board 11 (CPU 103), and the normal symbol display are provided for the purpose of preventing an increase in cost due to the provision of these dedicated lamps and LEDs. The display mode of the device 20 is changed to a special display mode that is not displayed during a normal game (during variable display, during non-variable display (standby), during a jackpot game, and the like), for example, a blinking display and a special display pattern (special display). The notification may be made by lighting and displaying in FIG.

  In addition, when a dedicated lamp, LED, or the like is provided, in order to prevent a player or the like from easily recognizing that the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked, for example, these lamps or LEDs may be used. An LED or the like may be provided inside the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, or the ordinary symbol display device 20.

  In the case of notifying both that the setting is being changed and that the setting is being checked, these states are notified (notified to the outside) in one notification mode (the same output signal). Alternatively, each of these states may be notified (notified to the outside) in an individual notification mode (different output signal) so that the state of each state can be specified from the outside.

  If the main board 11 (CPU 103) can notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed by lighting or blinking of a dedicated lamp, LED, or the like, the display control unit in the effect control board 12 The setting is being changed immediately by lighting / flashing of a dedicated lamp or LED without waiting for the rise of the 123 (without waiting for the display of a message such as “setting is being changed” on the image display device 5). It is possible to notify that there is something or that the setting is being confirmed.

(Description of feature portion 148SG in the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 148SG is a gaming machine capable of changing an effect that can be executed during the fluctuation display by an operation of the player. Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, an interface area 148SG005I is displayed at the lower center of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment. The lower left portion of the interface area 148SG005I is a first hold storage display area in which a hold display can be displayed so as to be able to specify a change storage hold number (special figure hold storage number) corresponding to the first special symbol special figure game. In the lower right part of the interface area 148SG005I, a hold display can be displayed so as to specify the number of variable storages (number of special figure storages) corresponding to the special figure game of the second special symbol. It is set in the second hold storage display area. Further, the upper part of the interface area 148SG005I is set as a normal timer effect execution area in which a normal timer effect described later can be executed.

  The control command transmitted from the relay board 15 to the effect control board 12 from the main board 11 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. These effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp. 9 and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like.

  FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte representing MODE (command classification) and the second byte representing EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10A is an example, and another command form may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10A, the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating a variation start in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content of the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. ), And different EXT data are set according to the result of determining which of the plurality of types is the big hit type when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” (big hit type determination result).

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “losing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable change A" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable change B" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result indicating that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the stop (decision) of the decoration symbol in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is a game state (high base state) in which time reduction control is performed. , Time-saving state).

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fan fare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening that notifies that the special winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type decision result by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during opening of the special winning opening and the notification command after opening of the special winning opening, different EXT data is set in accordance with the number of rounds executed (for example, “1” to “15”) in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. This is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified in the first reserved storage display area or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified in the second reserved storage display area or the like. The first reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning port and the first starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved storages decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of the execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be used.

  FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-2, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, on the main substrate 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination and the random number value MR4 for normal display result determination is controlled to be countable. It should be noted that other random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR4 may be counted by the CPU 103 using different random counters by software update, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

  Although the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 10B, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR4 may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 10C illustrates a variation pattern in the characteristic portion 148SG. In the characteristic portion 148SG, among the cases in which the variable display result is "losing", the variable display mode of the decorative design is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the result is “big hit”. In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is “small hit”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “losing” and the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is called a non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as a “non-reach loss fluctuation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “loss”. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit fluctuation pattern. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern.

  The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the feature portion 148SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach, like normal reach α, normal reach β,. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ, in addition to super reach α and super reach β, may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 10C, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature portion 148SG is set to be shorter than the super reach variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β. ing. Also, regarding the special figure variation time of the super-reach variation pattern in which the super-reach effect such as super-reach α and super-reach β in the feature section 148SG is executed, The special figure change time is set longer than the change pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

  Note that, in the present feature part 148SG, as described above, the fluctuation display result is set to be “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, so that the big hit expectation degree is increased. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time is, the higher the expectation of big hit is. That is, in the present feature unit 148SG, when the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, the super reach effect of the super reach α and the super reach β is executed at a higher ratio than the normal reach effect.

  In the characteristic section 148SG, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first by determining the types of the fluctuation patterns, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, and the type of super reach. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, the variation pattern is determined using only the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random number value for determining the variation pattern type is determined. After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value of, the execution is performed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type. It may be determined variation pattern.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5 prepared for the CPU 103 to make various types of determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11 and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. And a variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  FIG. 10D illustrates a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present feature part 148SG, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A separate display result determination table may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

  The display result determination table is determined to be a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display apparatus 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display apparatus 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is referred to as “big hit” to determine whether or not to control the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result determination. It is a table.

  In the display result determination table of the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 determines whether the gaming state is a normal state, a time-saving state (low-probability state), or a probable change state (high-probability state). The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”, “losing”, and “small hit”.

  In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result determination includes the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result to the big hit game state with the special figure display result being "big hit". The special map display result is “judgment”, which is the determination data assigned to the result of determining whether or not to control the small-big hit game state. In the display result determination table, when the game state is in the probable change state (high-probability state), a larger number of determination values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low-probability state) are "big hit" special figure display results Assigned to. Thus, in the probable change state (high-precision state) in which the probable change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time-saving state (low-probability state) is set, the special map display result is set to the "big hit" to control the big hit gaming state Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in the feature portion 148SG of the present embodiment), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the big hit game state with the “big hit” as the result is increased (the present embodiment). The feature of the form is about 1/30 for 148SG). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probable state (high-precision state), the probability that it is determined that the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state is determined. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot game state so as to be higher.

  In the display result determination table, the same number of determination values are assigned to “small hits” regardless of the gaming state. As a result, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be the small hitting game state and controlled to the small hitting game state is the same regardless of the gaming state (the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment has approximately the same probability). 1/200).

  FIG. 10-5 shows a configuration example of the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table of the feature unit 148SG indicates that when the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” and the game is controlled to the big hit game state, the big hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination. This is a table that is referred to to determine whether or not to make a decision. In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which the variable display (fluctuation) is performed in the special figure game is the first special figure (a special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special figure (the second special figure). The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is “non-probable change”, “probable change big hit A”, “probable change big hit B” Are assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots.

  Here, the big hit type in this feature portion 148SG will be described with reference to FIG. 10-5 (B). In this feature portion 148SG, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are performed as the big hit type after the end of the big hit game state. The probability change big hit A and the probability change big hit B which are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and the non-probability change big hit which shifts to the low accuracy high base state after only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game state is completed. I have.

  As described above, in the jackpot game state based on the “probable variable jackpot A” and the jackpot game state based on the “non-probable variable jackpot A”, 16 rounds of changing the special variable prize ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are performed (so-called “round”). 16 rounds), a jackpot that is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the jackpot game state based on the “probable change jackpot B”, as described above, five rounds (so-called five rounds) for changing the special variable prize ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. It is a big hit. Therefore, there is a case where “probably big hit A” is referred to as a 16 round (16R) probability big hit and “probably big hit B” is called a 5 round (5R) positive big hit.

  The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the big-hit jackpot A or the big-hit jackpot B have ended are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the big-hit game state ends. Therefore, if the big hit that has occurred again is the big hit big hit A or the big hit big hit B, the high-precision control and the time-saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that the big hit gaming state does not go through the normal state. It is a so-called connected state that occurs continuously.

  On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state by the “non-probable variable jackpot” is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature portion 148SG of the present embodiment) or The game ends when the big hit game state is reached before the number of special figure games is executed.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), “probable variable big hit A” and “probable variable big hit B” depend on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Are different in the assignment of judgment values to the jackpot types. In other words, when the fluctuation special map is the first special map, a determination value in a predetermined range (a value in the range of “81” to “100”) is assigned to the big hit type of “probable big hit B” with a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special map is the second special map, the determination value is not assigned to the big hit type of “probable change big hit B”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “probable jackpot B” with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special map game using the second special map, it is not determined that the big hit type is “probably variable big hit B” and the state is controlled to the short open big hit state with a small number of rounds. In a gaming state in which game balls easily enter the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of a short-term open big hit state in which few prize balls are obtained, thereby reducing the interest in the game. It can be prevented.

  In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of “non-probable change” is based on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The probability of a non-probabilistic big hit and the probability of a probable big hit are the same regardless of whether the fluctuation special map is the first special map or the second special map. It has been.

  Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination value to “probably variable big hit B” differs depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Is also different depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and for "probable variable big hit A" having a large number of rounds, the variation special figure is the second special figure. Is set to be more easily determined in the case of.

  It should be noted that, even when the fluctuation special map is the second special map, a judgment value in a predetermined range different from the case where the fluctuation special map is the first special map is assigned to the big hit type of “probable variable big hit B”. You may. For example, when the fluctuation special map is the second special map, a smaller determination value than when the fluctuation special map is the first special map may be assigned to the big hit type of “probable variable big hit B”. Alternatively, the big hit type may be determined with reference to the common table data regardless of whether the fluctuation special map is the first special map or the second special map.

  In the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 may be a backup RAM partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply becomes incapable of discharging the backup power supply capacitor). You. In particular, at least the game state, that is, data corresponding to the control state of the game control means (such as a special process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  In the RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 148SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-6 is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Have been. The game control data holding area 148SG150 shown in FIG. 10-6 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 148SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 148SG151B, a general figure holding storage unit 148SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 148SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 148SG153, a game control counter setting unit 148SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 148SG155.

  The first special map reservation storage unit 148SG151A stores a special start-up prize (first start prize) generated by a game ball passing through (entering) a first start prize-winning opening formed by the prize-ball apparatus 6A, but not yet started. The game data (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit 148SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the hold number in the first start winning opening and associates the hold number with the first start condition in passing (entering) the game ball. Based on the establishment, the CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like. Is stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 148SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display) in this special figure game Based on the result, it becomes the suspension information that enables to determine whether or not a big hit occurs.

  The second special figure reservation storage unit 148SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred but has not yet started. The reservation data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 148SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the hold number in the second start winning opening and associates the hold number with the second start condition for passing (entering) the game ball. Based on the establishment, the CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like. Is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 148SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display) in this special figure game Based on the result, it becomes the suspension information that enables to determine whether or not a big hit occurs.

  It should be noted that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, the opening information indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening is included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

  The general figure holding storage unit 148SG151C stores the hold information of the general figure game that has not yet been started by the ordinary symbol display 20, even though the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure holding storage unit 148SG151C determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game ball, in association with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate 41. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 148SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 148SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting section 148SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 148SG153 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 148SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 148SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 148SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting a part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 148SG154, a random number value that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value. The numerical data indicating each random number value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or an arithmetic process on all or a part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 148SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 148SG155 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, effect control data holding as shown in FIG. An area 148SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 148SG190 shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 148SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 148SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 148SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 148SG194. Have.

  The effect control flag setting unit 148SG191 includes a plurality of types of effect operation states such as a display state of an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and a plurality of states whose states can be updated in response to an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 148SG191 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state.

  The effect control timer setting unit 148SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 148SG192 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 148SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 148SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 148SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 148SG194 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 148SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting part 148SG194. In the start prize receiving command buffer 148SG194A, a storage area (buffer numbers “1-1” to “1-4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of reserved special first reserved storages is stored. A corresponding area) and a storage area (an area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during the variable display are provided. In the start winning winning reception command buffer 148SG194A, a storage area (buffer numbers “2-1” to “2-4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of reserved special second reserved storages is stored. ) And a storage area (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display. When there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, a starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), a symbol designation command, a fluctuation category designation The four commands, ie, the command and the notification command of the number of reserved storages (the first notification command of the number of reserved storages or the second notification command of the number of reserved storages), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning reception command buffer 148SG194A include the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation category designation command, A storage area (entry) for separately storing the first special figure pending storage and the second special figure pending storage in association with the reserved storage number notification command is secured.

  The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest hold storage (buffer number “1-1” or buffer number “2-1”) is started The buffer number “1-0” or the buffer number “2-0” for storing the contents of the hold storage satisfying the start condition is displayed in the variable display. Is completed in the decorative symbol change stop processing executed when the process is completed.

  At the time of starting winning in the first starting winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the head (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the receiving command buffer 148SG194A at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning in the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the head (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 148SG194A at the time of starting winning. Go. At the time of the start winning, a command from the starting opening winning designation command to the notification command of the number of retained storages is sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is stored in the storage area corresponding to each of the suffixes “1” to “4” of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol designation command, the fluctuation category designation command, and the pending storage number notification command.

  The command stored in the start prize receiving command buffer 148SG194A shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) has an entry (buffer) corresponding to the suspended storage of the variable display completed immediately before every time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The entry stored in the number “1-0” or “2-0” is deleted, and the entry (buffer number “1-1” or “2”) corresponding to the suspended storage of the variable display to be started. -1), and the storage contents of the entries after the start of the variable display suspension storage are shifted. For example, in the case where the decorative display of the first special figure hold storage is changed in the storage state shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), each command stored in the buffer number “0” is deleted, and the buffer number “0” is deleted. Each command stored in “1” is shifted to the buffer number “0”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “1”. Each command stored in the area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “3” and “4” is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers “2” and “3”. Therefore, the buffer number “0” is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

  Next, an operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present feature part 148SG will be described. FIG. 10-8 is a part of a flowchart showing the rendering control process in the feature section 148SG. In this effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the above-described prefetch notice setting process, and then displays the hold memory display in the first hold memory display area and the second hold memory display area in the start winning reception command buffer 148SG194A. A pending display update process is performed to update the display according to the stored contents. Then, any one of steps S170 to S177 is performed.

  FIG. 10-9 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process in FIG. In variable display start setting processing, effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (148SGS351). If the first variation start command reception flag is set (148SGS351; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning reception command buffer 148SG194A. The various command data and various flags that are additionally stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (148SGS352). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because there is no destination to shift, so that the contents cannot be shifted.

  If the first change start command reception flag is not set in 148SGS351 (148SGS351; N), it is determined whether the second change start command reception flag is set (148SGS353). If the second change start command reception flag is not set (148SGS353; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second change start command reception flag is set (148SGS353; Y), start. The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers “2-0” to “2-4” of the second special figure hold storage in the prize receiving command buffer 148SG194A are higher by one buffer number at a time. (148SGS354). Note that the contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because there is no destination to shift, so that the contents cannot be shifted.

  After the execution of 148SGS352 or 148SGS354, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (148SGS355).

  Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command) (148SGS356). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. I do.

  In the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability change jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, 3 symbols as a stop symbol. The combination (decorative symbol) of the decorative symbol whose symbol is "7" is determined. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, as the stop symbol, a plurality of combinations of odd symbols other than “7” (for example, “111”, (A combination of decorative symbols such as "333", "555", and "999"). Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probable variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination (big hit symbol).

  When the received variable display result designating command is the fifth variable display result designating command corresponding to the small hit, the combination of the decorative symbols having the predetermined rule except the combination of the big hits (the small hits) is used as the stop symbol. Designs: Combinations of "112", "223", etc., in which the "left" and "middle" decorative patterns are the same, but only the "right" decorative patterns are different, or continuous, such as "123" or "456" (Combination of numbers). When the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols different from the combination of the big hit and the small hit are not aligned as stop symbols. (Losing symbol) is determined.

  In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, a stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command read out in 148SGS355 is a variation pattern of normal reach or super reach (148SGS357). If the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern specification command read out at 148SGS355 is a fluctuation pattern of non-reach or special hit (small hit) (148SGS357; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS367, where the fluctuation pattern specification command read at 148SGS355 is If the variation pattern shown is the variation pattern of the normal reach or the super reach (148SGS357; Y), based on the variation pattern and the variation display result, the presence or absence of the execution of the normal timer effect in the variation display and the presence or absence of the execution of the special timer effect Is determined (148SGS358).

  As shown in FIG. 10C, the normal timer effect is a normal timer effect for the timing at which the decorative pattern is a combination of reach in the normal timer effect execution area set above the interface area 148SG005I. (Starting the subtraction display of the value of the normal timer) to notify the reach. The normal timer is timer-out (timer value is “0”) at the timing when the decorative symbol becomes a combination of reach. Further, the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer is displayed at the start timing of the super-reach reach effect.

  The special timer effect is to activate a special timer (start the subtraction display of the value of the special timer) in the timer image 148SG005T displayed on the lower right of the image display device 5 to execute a cut-in effect described later. This is an effect that notifies the timing. The special timer becomes timer-out (timer value is “0”) at the start timing of the cut-in effect. Further, the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer is displayed three seconds after the timer of the special timer expires.

  In the special timer effect in the feature portion 148SG of the present embodiment, a specific message is displayed based on the operation of the push button 31B while the special timer is operating, and the big hit gaming state is controlled by the displayed message. It is also an effect that executes a button operation effect that suggests a ratio.

  In the process of 148SGS358, as shown in FIG. 10A, if the variation pattern is normal reach and the variation display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the normal timer effect is not executed and the special timer effect is not executed. Is determined at a rate of 70%, execution of the normal timer effect and non-execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 30%, and non-execution of the normal timer effect and execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 0%. Then, the execution of the normal timer effect and the execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 0%. If the fluctuation pattern is normal reach and the fluctuation display result is lost, non-execution of the normal timer effect and non-execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 90%, and execution of the normal timer effect and non-execution of the special timer effect are determined. Is determined at a rate of 10%, non-execution of a normal timer effect and execution of a special timer effect are determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of a normal timer effect and execution of a special timer effect are determined at a rate of 0%. I do.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (B), if the variation pattern is super reach and the variation display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the normal timer effect is not executed and the special timer effect is not executed. Determine at a rate of 10%, determine the execution of the normal timer effect and the non-execution of the special timer effect at a rate of 20%, and determine the non-execution of the normal timer effect and the execution of the special timer effect at a rate of 30%. Then, the execution of the normal timer effect and the execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 40%. If the fluctuation pattern is super reach and the fluctuation display result is lost, the non-execution of the normal timer effect and the non-execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of the normal timer effect and the non-execution of the special timer effect are determined. Are determined at a rate of 30%, non-execution of the normal timer effect and execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of the normal timer effect and execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 10%. decide.

  In other words, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, when attention is paid to the case where the fluctuation display is performed in the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the ratio of the normal timer effect to be controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit expectation) is as follows. Is set to be higher than the rate at which the normal timer effect is executed and the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit expectation degree in normal reach fluctuation display; normal timer effect execution> normal timer effect non-execution).

  In addition, when focusing on the case where the fluctuation display is performed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the ratio of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect not being executed when the timer effect is not executed being controlled to the big hit game state (big hit effect). Expectation degree) is low, so that the ratio controlled by the big hit gaming state increases in the order of executing only the normal timer effect, executing only the special timer effect, and executing both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect. Set (Big hit expectation in the fluctuation display of super reach; Execute both normal timer effect and special timer effect> Execute only special timer effect> Execute only normal timer effect> Both normal timer effect and special timer effect Non-executed).

  After the execution of 148SGS358, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the normal timer effect (148SGS359). When the execution of the normal timer effect is determined (148SGS359; Y), the reach notification mode (the color of the numerical value displayed as the normal timer) in the normal timer effect is determined based on the fluctuation display result (148SGS360).

  In the process of 148SGS360, the effect control CPU 120 changes the color of the value of the normal timer as the reach notification mode to 10% when the fluctuation display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. White characters are determined at a rate, blue characters are determined at a rate of 30%, and red characters are determined at a rate of 60%. On the other hand, if the fluctuation display result is a loss, the color of the numerical value of the normal timer as the reach notification mode is determined to be white characters at a rate of 80%, blue characters at a rate of 15%, and 5% Determined in red by percentage.

  In other words, with respect to the normal timer effect in the feature portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the ratio (the big hit expectation) at which the normal timer is displayed in red in the normal timer effect execution area is controlled to the biggest hitting game state is high. When the normal timer is displayed in white characters in the normal timer effect execution area, the ratio of being controlled to the biggest hitting game state is set to be low (the expectation degree of the big hit for each reach notification mode (character color) in the normal timer effect) : Red letters> blue letters> white letters).

  After execution of 148SGS360, effect control CPU 120 sets a normal timer effect start waiting timer, and proceeds to 148SGS362 (148SGS361). If it is determined in the processing of 148SGS359 that non-execution of the normal timer effect has been determined (148SGS359; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS362 without executing the processing of 148SGS360 and 148SGS361.

  In 148SGS362, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the special timer effect has been determined (148SGS362). When the execution of the special timer effect is determined (148SGS362; Y), the effect result of the button operation effect executed during the super-reach reach effect is determined based on the fluctuation display result (148SGS363), and the special timer effect start waiting. The timer is set (148SGS364).

  In addition, in the process of 148SGS363, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the effect result of the button operation effect is “chance” at a rate of 30%. The display is determined, the display is determined to be "hot!" At a rate of 50%, and the display is determined to be "hot!" At a rate of 20%. On the other hand, if the fluctuation display result is lost, the effect result of the button operation effect is determined to be “chance” display at a rate of 70%, and “hot!” Is determined at a rate of 25%, and 5%. Is determined to be displayed as "Super hot!"

  In other words, in the button operation effect in the feature portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the ratio in which the “big heat!” Display is performed on the image display device 5 based on the operation of the push button 31B is controlled to the biggest hitting game state. (Big hit expectation) is high, and when the “chance!” Is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the operation of the push button 31B, the rate of controlling to the big hit gaming state is set to be low (button operation effect). Expectation of big hit for each production result: "Intense hot!" Display> "Hot!" Display> "Chance!" Display).

  After execution of 148SGS364, effect control CPU 120 determines an effect mode (effect type) of the cut-in effect based on the fluctuation display result (148SGS364). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-12, when the fluctuation display result is a big hit, the execution of the cut-in effect A in which the character A is displayed is determined at a rate of 20%, and the character B is displayed. The cut-in effect B is executed at a rate of 80%. If the result of the variable display is a loss, the execution of the cut-in effect A is determined at a rate of 80%, and the execution of the cut-in effect B is determined at a rate of 20%.

  That is, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, when the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as the cut-in effect, the character A is displayed on the image display device 5 as the cut-in effect. Is set to a high ratio (big hit expectation), which is controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit expectation for each character displayed as a cut-in effect; display character B> display character A).

  In the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, a form in which the character A or the character B can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a cut-in effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Three or more types of characters that can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a cut-in effect may be provided.

  If it is determined in 148SGS362 that non-execution of the special timer effect has been determined (148SGS362; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS365 without executing 148SGS363 and 148SGS364.

  In 148SGS365, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of at least one of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect has been determined (148SGSG365). When it is determined that at least one of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is to be executed (148SGS365; Y), the timer effect execution to be executed based on the combination of the timer effects whose execution is determined is suggested. The effect is determined (148SGS366), and the process proceeds to 148SGS367.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-13, when only the execution of the normal timer effect is determined, the execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and the second timer effect is performed. The execution of the execution suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 20%. When only the execution of the special timer effect is determined, the execution of the first timer effect suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of the second timer effect suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 60%. I do. Further, when both the execution of the normal timer effect and the execution of the special timer effect are determined, the execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is performed by 90%. Determined in percentages.

  That is, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, when the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, the special timer effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. It is set as follows.

  As described above, in the feature section 148SG of the present embodiment, the normal timer effect can be executed in both the normal reach fluctuation display and the super reach fluctuation display, while the special timer effect is displayed in the normal reach fluctuation display. Can be executed only in the super-reach fluctuation display in which the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state is high (the jackpot expectation is high). The change display is a super-reach change display at a higher rate than when the effect execution suggestion effect is executed, that is, the big hit gaming state is at a higher rate than when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. Means controlled.

  The first timer effect execution suggestion effect refers to the operation of the push button 31B after the start of the variable display or the start of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect based on the lapse of the operation reception period of the push button 31B. This is an effect to notify by displaying the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A on the display device 5 (see FIG. 10C). The second timer effect suggestion effect is an operation of the push button 31B after the start of the variable display or a start of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect based on the lapse of the operation reception period of the push button 31B. This is an effect to notify by displaying the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B on the display device 5 (see FIG. 10-21 (D)).

  In the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, while the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 as an image larger than the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A, the color and shape, Although the message displayed in the image is the same (see FIGS. 10-21 (C) and 10-21 (D)), the present invention is not limited to this. The first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B may be images having at least a part different in size, color, shape, messages displayed in the image, and the like.

  If it is determined in 148SGS365 that both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are not to be executed (148SGS365; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS367 without executing the process of 148SGS366.

  In 148SGS367, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, the presence or absence of the cut-in effect, and the effect mode (effect type) of the cut-in effect. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (148SGS368).

  The process table includes display control execution data for controlling display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and sound for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in time series in association with each process data n (1 to N). I have.

  In the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, in 148SGS367, a process table is selected according to the presence / absence of a variation pattern and a cut-in effect, and a process table corresponding to the effect mode of the cut-in effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of the decorative pattern and the cut-in effect can be performed using separate process tables. It may be executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 renders an effect device (image display as effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The control of the device 5, various lamps as effect parts, the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (148SGS369). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 to cause the image display device 5 to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control the turning on / off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  In the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs control such that a decorative pattern is displayed in a fluctuating manner with a fluctuating pattern corresponding to the fluctuating pattern designation command on a one-to-one basis. May select a variation pattern to be used from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designation command.

  Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (148SGS370). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (148SGS371). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols into the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data into the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variation of the decorative design. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172) (148SGS372).

  FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process performed as the variable display effect process illustrated in FIG. 7. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first decrements the values of the process timer, the fluctuation time timer, and the fluctuation control timer by -1 (148SGS401, 148SGS402, 148SGS403), and determines whether the process timer has expired. (148SGS404). When the process timer expires (148SGS404; Y), the process data is switched (148SGS405). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer value in the process table to the process timer (148SGS406). Further, the control unit controls the effect device (effect component) based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc. which are set next (148SGS407), and proceeds to 148SGS409.

  On the other hand, in 148SGS404, when the process timer has expired (148SGS404; N), the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (148SGS408), and the process proceeds to 148SGS409.

  In 148 SGS 409, effect control CPU 120 executes a timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process (148 SGS 409), and determines whether a normal timer effect start wait timer or a normal timer effect process timer described later is operating (148 SGS 410). ). When the normal timer effect start waiting timer or the normal timer effect process timer is in operation (148SGS410; Y), after executing the normal timer effect execution process (148SGS411), the process proceeds to 148SGS412. When neither the normal timer effect start waiting timer nor the normal timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS410; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS412 without executing the process of 148SGS411.

  In 148SGS412, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a special timer effect start waiting timer or a special timer effect process timer to be described later is in operation (148SGS412). When the special timer effect start waiting timer or the special timer effect process timer is in operation (148SGS412; Y), after executing the special timer effect execution process (148SGS413), the process proceeds to 148SGS414. When neither the special timer effect start waiting timer nor the special timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS412; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS414 without executing the process of 148SGS413.

  In 148SGS414, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the timing to hide the interface area 148SG005I, that is, whether or not it is the timing through the super-reach reach effect (148SGS414). If it is the timing to hide the interface area 148SG005I (148SGS414; Y), the interface area 148SGS005I is hidden in the image display device 5 (148SGS415), and the process proceeds to 148SGS416. If the timing is not the non-display timing of the interface area 148SGS005I (148SGS414; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS416 without executing the processing of 148SGS415.

  In 148SGS416, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation control timer has expired (148SGS416). When the fluctuation control timer is out (148SGS416; Y), the next display screen of the decorative symbol is created and written in the VRAM (148SGS417), the fluctuation control timer is reset, and the process proceeds to 148SGS419 (148SGS418).

  If the fluctuation control timer has not expired (148SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 148SG419 without executing the processes of 148SGS417 and 148SGS418.

  In 148 SGS 419, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable time timer has expired (148 SGS 419). If the variable time timer has not expired (148SGS419; N), it is further determined whether or not the fixed command reception flag is set (148SGS420). When the confirmation command reception flag is set (148SGS420; Y), if the interface area 148SG005I is not displayed, the interface area 148SG005I is displayed again on the image display device 5 (148SGS421), and the effect control process flag is set. Then, a value corresponding to the decorative symbol change stop processing is set (148SGS421), and the variable display effect processing ends. If the confirmed command reception flag is not set (148SGS420; N), the variable display effect processing ends without executing the processing of 148SGS421 and 148SGS422.

  In 148SGS419, even when the variable time timer is out (148SGS419: Y), if the interface area 148SG005I is not displayed, the interface area 148SG005I is re-displayed on the image display device 5 and (148SGS421). ), A value corresponding to the decoration symbol change stop processing is set to the effect control process flag (148SGS421), and the variable display effect processing ends.

  FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed as the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process in FIG. 10-14. In the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process, effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer is operating (148SGS431). When the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer is operating (148SGS431; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS443. When the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer is not operating (148SGS431; N), the timer effect execution suggestion effect is further executed. Is determined (148SGS432).

  When the execution of the timer effect execution suggestion effect has not been determined (148SGS432; N), the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process ends, and when the execution of the timer effect execution suggestion effect has been determined (148SGS432; Y), With reference to the process data being executed, it is determined whether or not it is time to start accepting the operation of the push button 31B (148SGS433). When it is the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (148SGS433; Y), the display of the push button operation promotion image for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is started on the image display device 5 (148SGS434). , 148SGS435. If it is not the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (148SGS433; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS435 without executing the process of 148SGS434.

  In 148 SGS 435, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the operation acceptance period of push button 31 </ b> B is in progress (148 SGS 435). If it is not during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B (148SGS435; N), the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution processing is ended. If it is during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B (148SGS435; Y), the operation of the push button 31B is further stopped. It is determined whether an operation has been detected (148SGS436).

  When the operation of the push button 31B is not detected (148SGS436; N), the effect control CPU 120 further determines whether or not it is the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B based on the process data being executed (148SGS437). ). If it is not the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (148SGS437; N), the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution processing is ended. If it is the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (148SGS437; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS438. When the operation of the push button 31B is detected in the 148SGS436 (148SGS436; Y), the process proceeds to the 148SGS438 without executing the process of the 148SGS437.

  In 148SGS438, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect has been determined (148SGS438). If the execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect has been determined (148SGS438; Y), the first timer effect execution suggestion effect process table corresponding to the timer effect whose execution is determined is set (148SGS439), and 148SGS441. Proceed to. If the execution of the second timer effect execution suggestion effect has been determined (148SGS438; N), the second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table corresponding to the timer effect whose execution is determined is set (148SGS440). , 148SGS441.

  The first timer effect execution suggestion effect process table A, which is set when execution of only the normal timer effect is determined, and a special timer effect execution effect process table A in the feature portion 148SG of the present embodiment. The first timer effect execution suggestion effect process table B that is set when execution of only the timer effect is determined, and the first timer effect that is set when execution of both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are determined The one-timer effect execution suggestion effect process table C is stored in the ROM 121 in advance.

  Further, as the second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table A in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table A which is set when execution of only the normal timer effect is determined. The second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table B, which is set when execution of only the special timer effect is determined, is set when both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are determined. The second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table C is stored in the ROM 121 in advance.

  Then, in 148SGS441, the effect control CPU 120 starts the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer in the process data 1 of the timer effect execution suggestion effect process table set in 148SGS439 or 148SGS440 (148SGS441).

  The timer effect execution suggestion effect process table includes display control execution data for controlling display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc., are time-series in association with each process data n (1 to N). Are arranged in order.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 renders an effect device (image display as effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5 controls the various lamps as effect parts, the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and the operation unit (the push button 31B, the stick controller 31A, etc.) (148SGS442), and the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution processing. To end.

  On the other hand, in 148SGS443, effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer by 1 (148SGS443), and determines whether or not the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer has expired (148SGS444). If the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer has expired (148SGS444; Y), it is further determined whether the timer effected timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer is the last timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer ( 148 SGS 445).

  If the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer that has expired is not the last timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer (148SGS445; N), the process data is switched (148SGS446). That is, the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer is newly started by setting the next set process timer value in the set timer effect execution suggestion effect process table in the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer (148SGS447). ). Further, the control unit controls the effect device (effect component) based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, and the like which are set next (148SGS448), and proceeds to 148SGS450.

  When the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer that has been out of the timer is the last timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer (148SGS445; Y), the timer effect execution suggestion effect is terminated (148SGS456), and the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution is performed. The process ends.

  If the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer has not expired in 148SGS444 (148SGS444; N), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect device (effect) in accordance with the contents of the process data corresponding to the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer. 148SGS449), and the process proceeds to 148SGS450.

  In 148SGS450, effect control CPU 120 refers to whether or not the notification period of the execution period of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is based on the process data being executed (148SGS450). If it is not during the notification period of the execution period of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect (148SGS450; N), the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process ends, and the notification period of the execution period of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is in progress. In the case (148SGS450; Y), it is determined whether or not only the execution of the normal timer effect is determined, that is, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect process table A or the second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table A is set. It is determined whether or not there is (148SGS451).

  If only the execution of the normal timer effect has been determined (148SGS451; Y), the period of the normal timer effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (148SGS452), and the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution processing ends. If the execution of the normal timer effect has not been determined or the execution of the special timer effect has also been determined (148SGS451; N), whether or not the execution of only the special timer effect has been determined, that is, the first timer effect has been determined. It is determined whether the timer effect execution suggestion effect process table B or the second timer effect execution suggestion effect process table B is set (148SGS453).

  If execution of only the special timer effect has been determined (148SGS453; Y), the special timer effect period is displayed on the image display device 5 (148SGS454), and the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process ends.

  Further, when the execution of both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is determined (148SGS453; N), the image display device 5 displays the total value of the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect. (148SGS455), the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process ends.

  FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed as the normal timer effect execution process in FIG. 10-14. In the normal timer effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the normal timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS461). When the normal timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS461; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS468, and when the normal timer effect process timer is not operating (148SGS461; N), the value of the normal timer effect execution start waiting timer is set to -1. Then, it is determined whether the normal timer effect execution start waiting timer has expired (148SGS463).

  If the normal timer effect execution wait timer has not expired (148SGS463; N), the normal timer effect execution process is terminated. If the normal timer effect execution wait timer has expired (148SGS463; Y), the normal timer has expired. An effect process table is set (148SGS464). Then, the normal timer effect process timer in the process data 1 of the set normal timer effect process table is started (148SGS465).

  The normal timer effect process table includes display control execution data for controlling display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and control of sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like, are associated with each of the process data n (1 to N) in a time series order. Are arranged.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 renders an effect device (image display as effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The control of the device 5, various lamps as effect parts, the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (148SGS466). For example, the operation of the normal timer is started in the interface area 148SG005I displayed on the image display device 5 (148SGS467), and the normal timer effect execution processing ends.

  On the other hand, in 148SGS468, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the normal timer effect process timer by -1 based on the fact that the normal timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS468). Then, it is determined whether or not the normal timer effect process timer has expired (148SGS469). When the normal timer effect process timer is out of the timer (148SGS469; Y), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach (148SGS470).

  When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach (148SGS470; Y), it is determined whether or not the timer-out is the last normal timer effect process timer (148SGS471). If it is the last normal timer effect process timer that has expired (148SGS471; Y), the normal timer effect is terminated and the normal timer effect execution processing is terminated (148SGS479). The end of the normal timer effect indicates that the display of the normal timer in the interface area 148SG005I ends. If the timer-out is not the last normal timer effect process timer (148SGS471; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS473.

  When the variation pattern of the variation display is the variation pattern of the super reach in 148SGS470 (148SGS470; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the timer-out is the last normal timer effect process timer. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the super-reach effect start timing (148SGS472). If it is the last normal timer effect process timer that has expired (148SGS472; Y), the normal timer effect is terminated and the normal timer effect execution processing is terminated (148SGS479). If the timer-out is not the last normal timer effect process timer (148SGS472; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS473.

  In 148SGS473, effect control CPU 120 switches the process data (148SGS473). That is, the normal timer effect process timer is newly started by setting the next set process timer value in the normal timer effect process table as the normal timer effect process timer (148SGS474). In addition, the control unit controls the effect device (effect component) based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, and the like which are set next (148SGS475), and proceeds to 148SGS477.

  If it is determined in 148SGS469 that the normal timer effect process timer has not expired (148SGS469; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect of the effect device (effect effect) in accordance with the contents of the process data corresponding to the normal timer effect process timer. (148SGS476), and the process proceeds to 148SGS477.

  In 148SGS477, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the timing at which the display of the normal timer in interface area 148SG005I changes to the reach notification mode, that is, whether or not it is the timer out timing of the normal timer in the normal timer effect. (148SGS477). If the display of the normal timer in the interface area 148SG005I is not at the timing of changing to the reach notification mode (148SGS477; N), the normal timer effect execution processing is terminated, and the display of the normal timer in the interface area 148SG005I changes to the reach notification mode. If there is (148SGS477; Y), the display of the normal timer is changed to the reach notification mode in the character color determined in the variable display start setting process 148SGS360 (see FIG. 10-9) (148SGS478), and the normal timer effect The execution process ends.

  FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed as the special timer effect execution process in FIG. 10-14. In the special timer effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS481). When the special timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS481; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS488. When the special timer effect process timer is not operating (148SGS481; N), the value of the special timer effect execution start wait timer is set to -1. Then, it is determined whether or not the special timer effect execution start waiting timer has expired (148SGS483).

  If the special timer effect execution wait timer has not expired (148SGS483; N), the special timer effect execution process ends, and if the special timer effect execution wait timer has expired (148SGS483; Y), the special timer An effect process table is set (148SGS484). Then, the special timer effect process timer in the process data 1 of the set special timer effect process table is started (148SGS485).

  The special timer effect process table includes display control execution data for controlling display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and control of sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like, are associated with each of the process data n (1 to N) in a time series order. Are arranged.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 renders an effect device (image display as effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The control of the apparatus 5, various lamps as effect parts, the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and the operation unit (the push button 31B, the stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (148SGS486). For example, a special timer effect timer image 148SG005T (see FIG. 10-23 (B)) is displayed on the image display device 5, and the special timer operation is started in the timer image 148SG005T (148SGS487), and the special timer effect is performed. The execution process ends.

  On the other hand, in 148SGS488, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the special timer effect process timer by -1 based on the fact that the special timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS488). Then, it is determined whether or not the special timer effect process timer has expired (148SGS489). If the special timer effect process timer is out of timer (148SGS489; Y), it is determined whether or not the timer out is the last special timer effect process timer (148SGS490). If the timer is out of the last special timer effect process timer (148SGS490; Y), the timer image 148SG005T is hidden from the image display device 5, the special timer effect ends, and the special timer effect execution processing ends. (148SGS496).

  If the timer-out is not the last special timer effect process timer (148SGS490; N), the process data is switched (148SGS491). That is, the special timer effect process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer value in the special timer effect process table as the special timer effect process timer (148SGS492). In addition, the control unit controls the effect device (effect component) based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, and the like which are set next (148SGS493), and proceeds to 148SGS495.

  If it is determined in 148SGS489 that the special timer effect process timer has not expired (148SGS489; N), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect of the effect device (effect effect) in accordance with the contents of the process data corresponding to the special timer effect process timer. (148SGS494), and the process proceeds to 148SGS495.

  Then, effect control CPU 120 executes the button operation effect execution process for executing the button operation effect in 148SGS495, and ends the special timer effect execution process.

  FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed as the button operation effect execution process in FIG. 10-17. In the button operation effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the button operation effect process timer is operating (148SGS501). If the button operation effect process timer is in operation (148SGS501; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS510. If the button operation effect process timer is not in operation (148SGS501; N), it is time to start accepting the operation of the push button 31B. Is determined (148SGS502).

  When it is the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (148SGS502; Y), the display of the push button operation promotion image 148SG005P (refer to FIG. 10-23 (E)) is started on the image display device 5 so that the player is displayed. Prompts the operation of the push button 31B (148SGS503), and proceeds to 148SGS504. If it is not the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (148SGS502; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS504 without executing the process of 148SGS503.

  In 148SGS504, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the operation acceptance period of push button 31B is being accepted (148SGS504). If the operation of the push button 31B is being accepted (148SGS504; Y), it is further determined whether or not the pushbutton 31B is operated (148SGS505). If there is no operation on the push button 31B (148SGS505; N), it is determined whether or not it is the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (148SGS506). If it is not the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (148SGS506; N), the button operation effect execution processing is ended. If it is the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (148SGS506; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS507.

  When the push button 31B is operated in the 148SGS505 (148SGS505; Y), the process proceeds to the 148SGS507 without executing the process of the 148SGS506.

  Then, in 148SGS507, the effect control CPU 120 starts the button operation effect process timer in the process data 1 of the set button operation effect process table (148SGS508).

  The button operation effect process table includes display control execution data for controlling display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and control of sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like, are associated with each of the process data n (1 to N) in a time series order. Are arranged.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 renders an effect device (image display as effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The control of the device 5, the various lamps as effect parts, the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (148SGS509). For example, the display of the result of the button operation effect on the image display device 5 is started, and the button operation effect execution process ends.

  Further, in 148SGS510, effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the button operation effect process timer by -1 based on the fact that the button operation effect process timer is operating (148SGS510). Then, it is determined whether or not the button operation effect process timer has expired (148SGS511).

  If the button operation effect process timer has expired (148SGS511; Y), it is further determined whether the button operation effect process timer that has expired is the last button operation effect process timer (148SGS512). When the button operation effect process timer that has been out of the timer is the last button operation effect process timer (148SGS512; Y), the display of the effect operation result of the button operation effect on the image display device 5 is ended to end the button operation effect process. Then (148SGS517), the button operation effect execution processing ends.

  If the button operation effect process timer that has expired is not the last button operation effect process timer (148SGS512; N), the process data is switched (148SGS513). That is, by setting the next set process timer value in the set button operation effect process table to the button operation effect process timer, the button operation effect process timer is started again (148SGS514). Further, the control unit controls the effect device (effect component) based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, and the like which are set next (148SGS515), and ends the button operation effect execution process.

  If the button operation effect process timer has not expired in 148SGS511 (148SGS511; N), the effect device is controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data corresponding to the button operation effect process timer (148SGS516), and the button sosua effect effect execution processing is performed. finish.

  As described above, by executing the normal timer effect execution process and the special timer effect execution process, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, when executing only the normal timer effect in the variation display of the variation pattern of the normal reach, As shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), the timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed for 5 seconds from the change start timing. Next, from the timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the normal timer is operated in the interface area 148SG005I as a normal timer effect for 15 seconds. Then, from the timing 25 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (the timing at which the normal timer times out), the display of the normal timer is displayed in the reach notification mode for 5 seconds until the timing of the end of the fluctuation. I have.

  When only the normal timer effect is performed in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden in the image display device 5 from the fluctuation start timing to the fluctuation end timing. That is, in the fluctuation display of the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the interface area 148SG005I is always displayed on the image display device 5.

  When only the normal timer effect is executed in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed for 5 seconds from the fluctuation start timing, as shown in FIG. . Next, from the timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the normal timer is operated in the interface area 148SG005I as a normal timer effect for 15 seconds. The display of the normal timer is displayed in the reach notification mode for 5 seconds from the timing 25 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (timing when the normal timer times out) to the start timing of the super-reach reach effect. It has become.

  In the case where only the normal timer effect is executed in the variation display of the variation pattern of the super reach, the interface area 148SG005I is displayed on the image display device 5 from the variation start timing to the start timing of the reach reach of the super reach. The interface area 148SG005I is not displayed on the image display device 5 from the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach to the end timing of the variable display.

  That is, in the case where only the normal timer effect of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is executed in the change display of the characteristic portion 148SG in the present embodiment, the change display is performed in the super reach change pattern as described above. Is controlled to a jackpot gaming state at a higher rate than when the fluctuation display is executed in the normal reach fluctuation pattern (big hit expectation for each fluctuation pattern; super reach> normal reach), and the super reach fluctuation pattern When the fluctuation display is executed, the interface area 148SG005I is hidden at the start timing of the super-reach reach effect, while when the fluctuation display is executed in the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the interface area 148SG005I is displayed. Since the non-display is not performed, when the interface area 148SG005I is non-displayed during the variable display, the big hit game state is controlled at a higher rate than when the interface area 148SG005I is not non-displayed during the variable display. Has become.

  In the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, when the interface area 148SG005I is hidden during the variable display, the jackpot game state is set at a higher rate than when the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden during the variable display. The control mode is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden during the variable display, the interface area 148SG005I is hidden during the dynamic display. May be controlled to a bigger hit gaming state at a higher rate than in the case of

  Further, in the case of executing only the special timer effect of the short timer effect and the special timer effect in the fluctuation display in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed over a period of seconds. Next, the display of the timer image 148SG005T is started on the image display device 5 at a timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the special timer is operated on the timer image 148SG005T for 45 seconds or 55 seconds. Then, from the timing 55 seconds or 65 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the cut-in effect is started based on the fact that the special timer has timed out. Note that the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer is hidden (display is terminated) 3 seconds after the timer of the special timer (start timing of the cut-in effect).

  When both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (B), the timer effect is performed for 10 seconds from the fluctuation start timing. Perform the execution suggestion effect. Next, from the timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the normal timer is operated in the interface area 148SG005I for 15 seconds. The display of the normal timer is displayed in the reach notification mode for 5 seconds from the timing 25 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (timing when the normal timer times out) to the start timing of the super-reach reach effect. It has become.

  Note that the interface area 148SG005I is displayed on the image display device 5 from the start timing of the fluctuation to the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach, while the image display is performed from the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach to the end timing of the fluctuation display. In the device 5, the interface area 148SG005I is hidden.

  In addition, in the fluctuation display, the display of the timer image 148SG005T is started on the image display device 5 at a timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the special timer is operated with the timer image 148SG005T for 45 seconds or 55 seconds. Then, from the timing 55 seconds or 65 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the cut-in effect is started based on the fact that the special timer has timed out. Note that the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer is hidden (display is terminated) 3 seconds after the timer of the special timer (start timing of the cut-in effect).

  In the case where the special timer effect is executed in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 (A) and 10-20 (B), 10 minutes from the timing 35 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Button operation effects are also executed over a period of seconds. For this reason, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, even during the special timer effect in which the operation period of the timer is longer than the normal timer effect, the player performs the button operation effect in parallel so that the player can use the image display device 5. Attention can be paid to the display continuously, and it is possible to prevent the entertainment interest from being reduced.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the button operation effect is always executed during the special timer effect, but the button operation effect is not executed during the normal timer effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which a button operation effect is not executed even during a special timer effect, or a button operation effect is executed during a normal timer effect.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, when executing only the normal timer effect, after performing the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect for 5 seconds, A normal timer effect is executed 5 seconds after the end of the timer effect execution suggestion effect, that is, a period of 5 seconds is provided from the end of the timer effect execution suggestion effect to the start of the normal timer effect (effect) In the case where only the special timer effect is executed, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are executed for 7 seconds, and then the timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. The special timer effect is executed 3 seconds after the end, that is, a 3 second period is set from the end of the timer effect execution suggestion effect to the start of the special timer effect. When both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are performed for 10 seconds. After the execution, the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed from the end timing of the timer effect execution suggestion effect (the effect start waiting period is 0 second).

  As described above, the execution period of the timer effect execution suggestion effect differs depending on which timer effect is executed. In particular, when the special timer effect is executed, the execution period of the timer effect execution suggestion effect is set longer than when only the normal timer effect is executed. That is, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, when the execution of the special timer effect having the effect period longer than the normal timer effect is determined, it is longer than when the execution of only the normal timer effect is determined. , The execution period of the timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed.

  Next, a display mode of the image display device 5 in a case where the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is executed during the variable display in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24. .

  First, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 (A) and 10-21 (B), when the variable display is started in a state in which the interface area 148SG005I is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 starts. Displays the operation promotion image 148SG005P.

  When the player operates the push button 31B while the operation promoting image 148SG005P is displayed on the image display device 5, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B elapses, as illustrated in FIG. Displaying the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A on the image display device 5 as the first timer effect execution suggestion effect, or the image display device as the second timer effect execution suggestion effect as shown in FIG. In 5, the display of the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B is executed.

  Next, when only the execution of the normal timer effect is determined in the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-22 (B), the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or After the normal timer effect period (15 seconds, which is the period up to reach) is notified in the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, the operation of the normal timer is started as a normal timer effect in the interface area 148SG005I.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (C), when the normal timer times out at the timing when the decorative symbol becomes a combination of reach, the display of the normal timer is displayed in any one of white, blue, and red colors. Change to reach notification mode.

  Further, after reaching the reach, if the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (D), the decorative pattern is derived and displayed in a combination of a loss or a big hit. At this time, the display of the interface area 148SG005I is continued without being hidden in the image display device 5.

  When only the execution of the special timer effect is determined in the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 (A) and 10-23 (B), the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or the After the special timer effect period (45 seconds or 55 seconds, which is the period until the decorative symbol is derived and displayed) is notified in the two-timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, the timer image 148SG005T is displayed on the lower right of the image display device 5. The display is started, and the operation of the special timer is started during the timer image 148SG005T as a special timer effect.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-23 (C) through 10-23 (F), during execution of the special timer effect, the operation of the special timer is continued during the timer image 148SG005T, and the super-reach reach effect is performed. After the start, the operation promotion image 148SG005P is displayed on the right part of the image display device 5 as a part of the button operation effect. As shown in FIG. 10D, the interface area 148SG005I is hidden from the image display device 5 at the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach.

  Then, when the player operates the push button 31B during the reach effect of the super reach, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B has elapsed, the effect result of the button operation effect on the right part of the image display device 5 Is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (G), the chance-up effect is started at the timing when the special timer expires, and the timer image 148SG005T is hidden three seconds after the start of the chance-up effect. Is done.

  When both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are determined to be executed in the variable display, the first timer effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 10-24 (A) and 10-24 (B). After the total value of the normal timer effect period and the special timer effect period is reported in the suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, the operation of the normal timer is started as a normal timer effect in the interface area 148SG005I. At the same time, the display of the timer image 148SG005T is started at the lower right of the image display device 5, and the operation of the special timer is started during the timer image 148SG005T as a special timer effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10C, when the normal timer times out at the timing when the decorative pattern becomes a combination of reach, the display of the normal timer is displayed in any one of white, blue, and red. Change to reach notification mode. After reaching the reach, the interface area 148SG005I is hidden at the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach, as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, in FIGS. 10-24 (D) to 10-24 (G), the button operation effects are executed as in FIGS. 10-23 (D) to 10-23 (G), and the special timer is set to the timer. The chance-up production starts from the timing of the out. Also, three seconds after the start of the chance-up effect, the timer image 148SG005T is hidden.

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the image display device 5 can display the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer and the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer, and also display the interface area during the variable display. When the 148SG005I is hidden, the jackpot game state is controlled at a higher rate during the variable display than when the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden. Therefore, it is determined whether the interface area 148SG005I is hidden. The player can be noticed, so that the entertainment interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, after the end of the normal timer effect, the interface area 148SG005 including the normal timer is hidden at the start timing of the super-reach reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the interface area 148SG005 including the normal timer may be displayed at a timing other than the timing at which the reach effect of the super-reach is started if the fluctuation display is performed after the end of the normal timer effect. It may be hidden.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10, the ratio of controlling only the special timer effect to the big hit game state by executing only the normal timer effect is set to be higher than the ratio of controlling to the big hit game state by executing only the normal timer effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect mode of the timer effect to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, the button operation effect is always executed during the special timer effect, but the button operation effect is not executed during the normal timer effect. Even during the execution period of the special timer effect in which the effect period is longer than the effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to the monotonous game by executing the button operation effect.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-10 and 10-13, when the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, the special timer effect is performed at a higher rate than when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. Is executed and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, the bigger hit gaming state is controlled at a higher rate than when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. Since the player can be made to pay attention to which of the execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-22 to 10-24, in the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the normal timer effect period and the special timer effect period. When both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed, the total value of the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect can be notified, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the characteristic part 148SG of the embodiment, when both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed, the period of the normal timer effect in the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is performed. And a form in which the total value of the periods of the special timer effects is notified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when performing both the normal timer effects and the special timer effects, In the one-timer effect execution suggestion effect or the second timer effect execution suggestion effect, only one of the normal timer effect period and the special timer effect period may be notified.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10-21, when executing the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are performed. Also, at the previous timing, the operation prompting image 148SG005P for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed on the image display device 5, and based on the operation of the push button 31B, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect or the second Since the two-timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, the player can pay attention to which of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed after the push button 31B is operated. , Can improve the entertainment interest.

  In the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the values of the normal timer and the special timer are subtracted toward 0 is illustrated as the predetermined operation in the present invention of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined operation of the present invention may be to add a value of a normal timer or a special timer toward a specific value.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, a normal timer effect and a special timer effect are exemplified as the predetermined effects in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to these, and the predetermined effects in the present invention are not limited to these. For example, the display amount of a predetermined meter or gauge may be increased or decreased.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are illustrated as the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect are performed by combining effects having different operation modes and different effect modes (for example, the first predetermined effect is an effect in which the value of a timer is added, and the second predetermined effect is a second predetermined effect. The effect may be to reduce the display amount of the meter).

  In the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the operation promoting image 148SG005P having the same mode is displayed on the image display device 5 when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed and when the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and differs between the case where the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed and the case where the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. The operation promotion image 148SG005P of the mode may be displayed on the image display device 5. In this manner, the player can be made to pay attention to which of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution effect effect is executed according to the mode of the displayed operation promotion image 148SG005P. , Can improve the entertainment interest.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-21, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are always executed in response to the operation of the push button 31B. Although the form in which the timer effect or the special timer effect is started is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the push button 31B is operated, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect or the second timer effect is produced. A case may be provided in which the execution suggestion effect is not executed and the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is not started.

  As the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A), an interface area 148SG005I including a normal timer, a special timer, and the like. For the timer image 148SG005T including the normal timer effect period, the special timer effect period, the total value of the normal timer effect period and the special timer effect period, and the like, the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect. Since the notification can be made in the execution suggestion image 148SG005B, the game entertainment can be improved.

  In particular, as the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect, the normal timer effect period is applied to only one of the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer and the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer. And the special timer effect period can be notified by the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, so that the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are produced. The player can pay attention to the interface area 148SG005I and the timer image 148SG005T, which are the target, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  As described above, the characteristic portion 148SG of the embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and changes and additions may be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. This is also included in the present invention.

  For example, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the special timer effect is executed for the cut-in effect that is the effect during the super-reach reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modification 148SG-1, a special timer effect may be executable for an effect to be executed before the start of the super-reach reach effect. In this case, when the special timer effect can be executed for the effect to be performed before the start of the super-reach reach effect, the special timer effect is executed for the effect to be executed before the start of the super-reach reach effect. When performing, that is, when the special timer effect is executed while the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer is being displayed (during the execution of the normal timer effect), and the effect (cut-in effect, etc.) executed during the super-reach reach effect , The rate controlled in the big hit game state is different between the case where the special timer effect is executed, that is, the case where the special timer effect when the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer is hidden is executed. (For example, Super Li When the special timer effect is executed for the effect that is executed during the reach effect of the super reach, the control is set to the big hit game state than when the special timer effect is executed for the effect that is executed before the start of the super reach reach effect. May be higher). By doing so, the player can be made to pay more attention to the special timer effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed during the variable display is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. An addition effect of adding the value of a timer operating as an effect may be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (A) to 10-25 (D) as a modified example 155SG-1, the image display device is operated during a period in which the timer is operating as a normal timer effect or a special timer effect. 5 displays an operation promotion image 148SG005P that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, after displaying the addition notification image 148SG005C indicating the value to be added to the operating timer on the image display device 5 based on the operation of the push button 31B, the timer indicating the value indicated in the addition notification image 148SG005C is operated. (A special timer in the present modified example 155SG-1).

  In addition, in the modified example 155SG-1, the form in which the addition effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the special timer is operating, it may be executed based on a trigger other than the operation of the push button 31B.

  In addition, in the modified example 155SG-1, the form in which the value shown in the addition notification image 148SG005C is added as the value of the special timer as the addition effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the addition effect is not limited thereto. The value shown in the addition notification image 148SG005C may be added as the value of the normal timer, or may be added as the value of both the normal timer and the special timer.

  Also, in the modified example 155SG-1, the mode in which the operation promoting image 148SG005P is displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect and the addition effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect executed based on the operation of the push button 31B during the execution of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect may be an effect other than the addition effect. Further, a plurality of operation reception periods of the push button 31B during the execution of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect may be provided, and different effects may be executed based on the reception of the operation of the push button 31B in each operation reception period. . Furthermore, in the characteristic part 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are executed from the same timing, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the one-timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect may be executed from different timings.

  Specifically, as a modified example 155SG-2, as shown in FIGS. 10-26 (A) to 10-26 (G), for example, a first timer effect execution suggestion effect is produced at the same timing as the characteristic portion 148SG. During the execution of the normal timer effect after execution (during the operation of the normal timer), the operation prompting image 148SG005P for prompting the first operation of the push button 31B is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation of the first push button 31B is performed. The addition effect is executed based on the.

  Then, after the value shown in the addition notification image 148SG005C is added to the value of the short timer by executing the addition effect (displaying the addition notification image 148SG005C on the image display device 5), the second push button 31B is displayed on the image display device 5. A push button operation promotion image 149SG005P for prompting an operation is displayed, and a second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 as a second timer effect execution suggestion effect based on the second operation of the push button 31B. What is necessary is just to start special timer production. In this way, by enabling the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect to be executed at different timings, it is possible to determine at what timing the timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. The player can be noticed, and the entertainment interest in the game can be improved.

  In the modified example 155SG-2, the form in which the execution timing of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is different from the execution timing of the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. By providing a plurality of timings at which at least one of the effect production suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect can be executed, a timer effect execution suggestion effect (and a normal timer effect or special It may be possible to make the player pay attention to whether the timer effect is executed.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above embodiment, the period from the start of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect or the second timer effect execution suggestion effect to the execution of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is constant (10 Second Embodiment), the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 155SG-3, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect after the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed. Is different from the period from when the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed to the time when the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is executed, so that the game becomes monotonous. May be prevented.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. However, for example, by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a gaming value, Can be started, and the variation display result is derived on a display device capable of varying display of a plurality of types of symbols each of which is identifiable, whereby one game is ended, and the variation display result derived on the display device becomes The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which a prize can be generated accordingly.

  When the gaming machine is a slot machine in this way, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 (A) to 10-27 (D) as a modified example 156SG-1, for example, the player instructs the slot machine. By operating the stop switch corresponding to each reel according to the above, the number of remaining games of the ART is displayed on the image display device during the ART in which the reel stops in a combination such as bell or replay. Further, during the additional zone in which the number of remaining games of the ART during the ART is added, the number of remaining games in the additional zone is also displayed on the image display device.

  When the remaining number of games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone are displayed on the image display device as described above, if a specific role (for example, a rare role such as cherry or watermelon) is won, the reel stops. The additional notification image 148SG005M is displayed on the image display device as an additional notification effect based on the information.

  Then, after the additional notification image 148SG005M is displayed on the image display device, the number of additional games indicated by the additional notification image 148SG005M may be added to both the number of remaining games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone. .

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed during the variable display is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 10-28 (A) to 10-28 (D), a part of the displayed timer (a part of the normal timer in the modification 156SG-2) is moved by the movable body 32 for a predetermined period. A concealment effect of concealing from a player may be executed over a period of time. When the concealment effect is performed in this manner, the concealment is released at least at a timing before the timing at which the normal timer expires. That is, the normal timer is hidden while a part of the normal timer is concealed by the movable body 32. , The normal timer effect and the concealment effect can be suitably executed.

  Although the modification 156SG-2 illustrates an example in which a part of the normal timer is hidden by the movable body 32, the present invention is not limited to this, and a part of the special timer is movable. It may be hidden by the body 32. Further, not only the part of the normal timer and the special timer that is concealed by the movable body 32 but also the entirety of the normal timer and the special timer may be concealed by the movable body 32.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the normal timer effect is decorated and executed for the timing at which the symbol is a combination of reach and the special timer effect is executed for the cut-in effect execution timing is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the target of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect may be other than the timing at which these decorative symbols are combined with the reach and the execution timing of the cut-in effect. For example, the normal timer effect may be executed for the start timing of the special timer effect, and the special timer effect may be executed for the timing at which the decorative design is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit or a loss. By doing so, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the execution of the special timer effect having a high jackpot expectation by executing the normal timer effect having a low jackpot expectation. Can be improved.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are executed during the variable display for executing the normal timer effect and the special timer effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first timer effect execution suggestion effect or the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is a variable display prior to a normal timer effect or a special timer effect variable display. May be executed over a plurality of variable displays. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the execution of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect over the plurality of variable displays, so that interest can be improved.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above embodiment, when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are executed, an example in which the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are reliably executed is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect or the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, the normal timer effect or the special timer effect may not be executed. Good.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the timing at which the normal timer and the special timer are hidden from the image display device 5 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The timing at which the normal timer and the special timer are hidden from the image display device 5 may be the same. By doing so, for example, the player can pay attention to an important effect indicating whether or not a fluctuation display result such as a super-reach reach effect is a big hit, and thus the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are started from the timing when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect are finished. The present invention is not limited to this. For the normal timer effect and the special timer effect, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion are completed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 second to 0.5 second). (10 seconds) later. By doing in this way, the player can pay attention to the execution of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect during the execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect or the second timer effect execution suggestion effect. Can be improved.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the normal timer effect and the special timer effect can be executed during the variable display is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The special timer effect may be executed as an effect other than during fluctuation display such as during a big hit game. For example, when it is possible to execute a normal timer effect or a special timer effect during a jackpot game, the effect of notifying that the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is controlled to a positively changing game state after the end of the jackpot game, The effect of notifying that the jackpot game is a 16-round jackpot may be executed.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the value of each timer is subtracted toward 0 as a normal timer effect or a special timer effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, in a normal timer effect or a special timer effect, an effect of stopping the value of each timer for a certain period (freeze effect) may be made executable. When the freeze effect can be executed in this way, by providing a case where a part of the value of each timer is concealed by the movable body 32 as shown in the modified example 156SG-2, The player may be allowed to pay more attention to whether the effect targeted by the effect is executed.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed in the image display device 5 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a pachinko game machine A display device different from the image display device 5 may be separately provided in the display device 1 so that the normal timer effect and the special timer effect can be executed on the display device. By doing so, a special feeling can be given to the execution of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect, and an area for displaying another effect on the image display device 5 can be secured. The effect in the gaming machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above embodiment, at least a part of the execution period of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is overlapped, but the present invention is not limited to this. The timer effect and the special timer effect may be executed such that there is no overlapping period. In such a case, for example, the normal timer effect may be executed for the special timer effect, that is, the special timer may be activated when the normal timer expires.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the ratio of controlling the big hit game state according to the execution / non-execution of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is different is illustrated. By executing the normal timer effect on the target, the normal timer effect may simply be an effect indicating the execution of another effect, and may not be related to the ratio controlled in the big hit game state.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the embodiment, the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer and the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer can be displayed on the image display device 5, and whether or not the interface area 148SG005I is hidden is displayed. Although the form in which the ratio controlled to the big hit game state is different according to the present invention is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a timer image including a special timer with a different target effect is displayed as an image. A plurality of timer images can be displayed on the device 5 (for example, three timer images are displayed on the image display device 5, and the first timer image (the first special timer) has the first pseudo continuous effect, the second timer image In the (second special timer), the second pseudo continuous production, the third timer image (the third Shall timer) as the target of the reach demonstration of super reach in) may be operating each special timer. Further, when a plurality of timer images 148SG005T can be displayed as described above, the rate of controlling the big hit game state may be different depending on the number of displayed timer images 148SG005T.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the title corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach is displayed from the start of the reach effect of the super reach (the characteristic portion 31AK of FIGS. 8-1 to 8-12), and the main substrate 11 ( The CPU 103) can set any one of a plurality of set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and stores a set secret value obtained by converting the set value in the RAM 102, and the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). Side can execute a suggestion effect (a morning background effect) indicating the set value (characteristic 122SG in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-27). Although the form in which the timer effect can be executed (the characteristic portion 148SG in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-28) has been disclosed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes one of these characteristic portions. It may be applied to features of the number.

  For example, in a case where the characteristic portion 122SG and the characteristic portion 148SG are applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a normal timer effect and a special timer effect, and effects related to the normal timer effect and the special timer effect (button operation effect, cut-in effect, etc.) , A timer effect execution suggestion effect, or the like, or the determination ratio of each effect mode may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Conventionally, as a gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-23222. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-23222, the player cannot pay attention to the first predetermined display or the second predetermined display after the specific mode is set, and the gaming interest is improved. There is a problem that can not be. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as means 1 of invention 148SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Image display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying an image,
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect or a cut-in effect) indicating that the state is controlled to the advantageous state, and use a predetermined display (for example, a normal timer or a special timer) displayed on the image display means. A predetermined operation (for example, an operation of subtracting the values of the normal timer and the special timer) is performed and the display mode of the predetermined display is specified (for example, the normal timer and the special timer are timer-out (the values of the normal timer and the special timer are set to 0). Effect) means (for example, a variable display shown in FIG. 10-14) in which a predetermined effect (for example, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect) can be executed in response to the execution of the suggestion effect. The part that executes the middle production process),
With
The predetermined display includes a first predetermined display (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer) and a second predetermined display different from the first predetermined display (for example, an interface area 148SG005I including a normal timer),
The ratio in which the advantageous state is controlled is different between the case where the second predetermined display is not displayed and the case where the second predetermined display is not displayed (for example, the interface area 148SG005I is hidden during the variable display). If this is done, the portion that is controlled to the big hit gaming state at a higher rate than when the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden during the variable display)
According to this feature, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the second predetermined display is non-displayed, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

Further, as means 2 of invention 148SG,
When the second predetermined display is non-display, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the second predetermined display is not non-display. If this is done, the portion that is controlled to the big hit gaming state at a higher rate than when the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden during the variable display)
According to this feature, the gaming machine can be made to pay more attention to whether or not the second predetermined display is hidden, so that the gaming interest can be improved. .

Furthermore, as means 3 of invention 148SG,
The predetermined effect using the first predetermined display when the second predetermined display is non-display is controlled to be more advantageous than the predetermined effect using the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display. (For example, as shown in the modified example 148SG-1, when the special timer effect is executed for the effect to be executed during the super-reach reach effect, the execution is performed before the start of the super-reach reach effect. (The part where the ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than when the special timer effect is executed for the effect
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to make a player pay attention to an effect mode of a predetermined effect using the first predetermined display.

Further, as means 4 of invention 148SG,
The predetermined effect using only the first predetermined display has a higher ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state than the predetermined effect using only the second predetermined display (for example, a big hit by executing only the special timer effect). (The part where the ratio controlled in the gaming state is set higher than the ratio controlled in the big hit gaming state by executing only the normal timer effect)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to make a player pay attention to an effect mode of a predetermined effect.

Furthermore, as means 5 of invention 148SG,
An operation detecting means (for example, a push button 31B) capable of detecting an operation;
The effect performing means is capable of executing an action corresponding effect (for example, a button operation effect) based on a detection result of the operation detecting means,
In the first predetermined display, a first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (B), 15 seconds from the start of the normal timer effect until the decorative symbol becomes a combination of reach) elapses as the predetermined effect. It is a display that becomes the specific mode when doing,
In the second predetermined display, the cut-in effect is started from the start of the special timer effect as shown in FIG. 10-20 (B), as the predetermined effect is a second period longer than the first period. 45 seconds or 55 seconds until the specified time has elapsed) is a display in the specific mode,
During the second period, the rate at which the action corresponding effect is executed is higher than that during the first period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, the button operation effect is always performed during the special timer effect). Is executed, but the button operation effect is not executed during the normal timer effect)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest during a predetermined effect.

Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine described in, for example, JP-A-2017-79866. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-79866, the effect of the effect of the predetermined display being different is insufficient, so that the player cannot pay attention to the predetermined display, and the entertainment is not interesting. There is a problem that it cannot be improved. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as means 1 of invention 155SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Display means (for example, the image display device 5) capable of displaying a predetermined display (for example, a timer image 148SGS005T including a special timer or an interface area 148SG005I including a normal timer);
A suggestion effect (e.g., a reach effect or a cut-in effect) indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and a predetermined operation using a predetermined display displayed on the display unit in response to the execution of the suggestion effect (e.g., An operation of subtracting the values of the normal timer and the special timer) to set the display mode of the predetermined display to a specific mode (for example, to set the normal timer and the special timer to timer out (set the values of the normal timer and the special timer to 0)) An effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10-14) capable of at least executing an effect (for example, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect);
With
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined effect (e.g., a normal timer effect) and a second predetermined effect (e.g., a special timer effect) having an effect mode different from the first predetermined effect,
Before executing the predetermined effect, the effect executing means may include a first special effect (for example, a first timer effect execution suggestion effect) and a second special effect (for example, a different effect mode from the first special effect). (For example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process shown in FIGS. 10 to 15).
When the second predetermined effect is executed, the advantageous state is controlled at a higher rate than when the first predetermined effect is executed (for example, when the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, A portion where the special timer effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed),
When the second special effect is executed, the second predetermined effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first special effect is executed (for example, a second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed). In the case, the portion controlled to the big hit gaming state at a higher rate than when the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed)
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the first special effect and the second special effect is executed. Can be improved.

Further, as means 2 of invention 155SG,
The special effect is an effect that indicates the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, the first timer effect execution suggestion is performed before the normal timer effect or the special timer effect). Part that performs the effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect),
The effect execution means can execute the special effect at different timings (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-26 as a modified example 155SG-2, a first timer effect execution suggestion effect and a second timer effect execution suggestion effect. Where execution timing differs from
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to at what timing the special effect is executed, so that it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

Further, as means 3 of invention 155SG,
A period from the execution of the first special effect to the execution of the predetermined effect is different from a period from the execution of the second special effect to the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a modification example). As 155SG-3, the period from the execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect to the execution of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect, and the normal timer effect or the special timer after the execution of the second timer effect execution suggestion effect. The part that varies the period until the performance is performed)
According to this feature, in the period from the execution of the special effect to the execution of the predetermined effect, the gaming becomes monotonous, thereby reducing the interest in the game. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as means 4 of invention 155SG,
The predetermined display includes a first predetermined display (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer) and a second predetermined display different from the first predetermined display (for example, an interface area 148SG005I including a normal timer),
The special effect is an effect indicating the period of the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A), the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect). Of the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B),
The effect executing means,
The predetermined effect can be executed for at least one of the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A), A portion that reports the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect in the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B),
As the special effect, it is possible to suggest a sum of a predetermined effect period for the first predetermined display and a predetermined effect period for the second predetermined effect (for example, FIG. 10-24 (A)). As shown in (1), a portion that reports the total value of the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect in the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B)
According to this feature, a game machine characterized by the following is suggested: a total value of a predetermined effect period for the first predetermined display and a predetermined effect period for the second predetermined effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

Further, as means 5 of the invention 155SG,
An operation detecting means (for example, a push button 31B) capable of detecting an operation;
The effect performing means may be a common effect based on the detection result of the motion detecting means at a timing before the execution of the first special effect and the second special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (B)). In which the image display device 5 can execute an operation prompting image 148SG005P that prompts a player to operate the push button 31B). For example, since the player can be made to pay attention to which of the first special effect and the second special effect is executed after the common effect, the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration thereof is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other exemplary embodiments described below.

  Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications, and the configurations shown in the below-described embodiments and each of the modifications, all or some of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiments disclosed this time are merely examples in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above and the following description, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) and has at least a first numerical display area (for example, an interface including a normal timer). The area 18SG005I, the remaining game number display area of the ART in the modified example 156SG-1, and the second numerical value display area (for example, the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer, and the remaining game number display area of the additional zone in the modified example 156SG-1) ), And a predetermined effect (for example, normal) in which a numerical value is updated to a specific value in at least one of the first numerical display area and the second numerical display area. Timer production, special timer production, and the number of additional games in the modified example 156SG-1 As shown in FIG. 10-22 (A) and FIG. 10-23 (A), a special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (A) or FIG. 10-23 (A)) for suggesting the predetermined effect, A part for notifying the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect in the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, and an effect execution means (for example, effect control) CPU 120), and the effect execution means executes, as the special effect, a suggestion effect for the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical display area and the second numerical display area. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A), 10-23 (A), and 10-24 (A), , A special timer effect period, a normal timer effect period, and a special timer effect period in a total value in the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, and modifications. As shown in 156-1, the number of added games is added to both the remaining number of games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the added zone), and further, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player is controlled. Suggestion effect execution means (eg, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an advantageous effect effect (e.g., a reach effect) suggesting that a title is associated with the title corresponding to the advantageous effect effect (e.g., for effect control). CPU 120), and wherein the title notification means is provided from the start of the advantageous suggestion effect. A game machine capable of notifying a title corresponding to the advantageous suggestion effect when a fixed period has elapsed (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).

  According to such a configuration, as a special effect, an effect that indicates the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area can be executed, so that the entertainment of the game can be improved. In addition, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of improving a game entertainment and enhancing a staging effect, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player. ), A suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an advantageous effect effect (for example, a reach effect) that indicates that the advantageous state is controlled, and a title corresponding to the advantageous effect effect. And a notifying title notifying means (for example, effect control CPU 120), wherein the title notifying means can notify a title corresponding to the advantageous suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the advantageous suggestion effect. (For example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). Hereinafter, an example of the embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, a characteristic portion of another embodiment will be described. Next, the characteristic portion 112IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board constituting a gaming board surface. (Gauge board) 2 and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting and firing device and driven into the game area. Further, the game machine frame 112IW003 has a glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window between a door opening position for opening the front surface of the game machine frame 112IW003 centering on the left side and a door closing position for closing the front surface. The game area is provided rotatably, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 112IW003a. When the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

  Further, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a clerk or the like of a game arcade into a lock and unlocking it, and players other than the clerk can open the gaming machine frame 112IW003 and the glass door frame. The 112IW003a cannot be opened.

  The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 112IW201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. The main board 11 has a setting key 112IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later, and a setting key for changing a set value such as a jackpot winning probability (ballout rate) described later in the setting change state. A setting changeover switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

  The setting switch main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052, is housed in the board case 112IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052. Are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the right rear part of the substrate case 112IW201 so that the operation can be performed without opening the substrate case 112IW201.

  Since the board case 112IW201 having the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. Operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the setting key 112IW051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a clerk or the like at the game arcade, only the clerk having the setting key can operate the setting key 112IW051. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. In the characteristic portion 112IW, the mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys has been described as an example, but one key may be shared.

  Further, on the board case 112IW201, a display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029 are arranged. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and are arranged at the upper left of the board case 112IW201. That is, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged on the front of the board case 112IW201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. This is a front view when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting change switch 112IW052 of the present feature section 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. There is a possibility that the setting key 112IW051 or the setting change switch 112IW052 may be operated from the inside of the gaming island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in the present characteristic part 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, a board including a setting key 112IW051 and a setting changeover switch 112IW052 at the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A that covers the right side of the case 112IW201 from the rear side is attached. The security cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 112IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction, and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is made of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the board case 112IW201. The security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a via the front end of the short piece 112IW500Aa.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the long piece 112IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right part of the board case 112IW201 from behind the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. This covers the right side of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 cannot be operated by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11C, in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 to move from the long piece 112IW500Ab. By separating, the covered state by the long piece 112IW500Ab is released, and the state becomes operable.

  In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 112IW, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A regulates the operation of the operation section including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. In the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened while the state is maintained, the restriction state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting change switch 112IW052 is permitted. State.

  Since the board case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The setting value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 unless a store clerk or the like at the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 112IW003 with the door key.

  However, even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) in a gaming arcade, even if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, for example, another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 An illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate enters between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a setting key 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is a possibility that the setting value is changed by operating the setting switch 112IW052 or the setting change switch 112IW052. Therefore, when the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the setting key 112IW051 is switched to the setting key 112IW051 by the security cover 112IW500A. Restricted state in which operation on the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is restricted By being maintained, it is possible to suitably suppress the abuse.

  Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the right side of the back side of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered by the security cover 112IW500A, the security cover 112IW500A having transparency is used. Since the main board 11 and the like accommodated in the case 112IW201 can be seen through, it is possible to easily confirm the status of the mounting surface and the sealing seal on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

  In the feature section 112IW, on the side of the main substrate 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the general figure display result determining method Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. It should be noted that other random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5 and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various types of determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11 and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. And a variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), and FIG. -4 (C), a big hit variation pattern judgment table (not shown), a big hit variation pattern judgment table (not shown) in addition to the big hit type judgment table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), and a loss shown in FIG. 11-6. A variation pattern determination table, a general-purpose display result determination table (not shown), a general-purpose variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present feature section 112IW has a configuration in which the jackpot winning probability (payout rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to the set value. . The set value has three stages of 1 to 3, 1 is the lowest payout rate, and the payout rate increases as the value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3, the advantage gradually increases.

(Display result judgment table)
FIGS. 11A to 11C are explanatory diagrams illustrating display result determination tables corresponding to the respective set values. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each of the display result determination tables, the variable special figure designating buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and the variable special figure designating buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, the determination value of the big hit is set.

  As shown in FIG. 11-4A, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, the variable special figure designating buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. , The jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probable change, 1/32 at the time of probable change) than when the set value is "2" or "3". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Wins with the same probability (1/320 for non-probable changes and 1/32 for probable changes) when the first special symbol is the subject of variable display. I do.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/300 at non-probable change, 1/30 at probable change) than in certain cases. Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Wins the jackpot with the same probability (1/300 for non-probable changes and 1/30 for probable changes) when the first special symbol is the subject of variable display. I do.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11C, when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability than the case of “2” (1/280 at the time of non-probable change, 1/28 at the time of probable change). Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Wins the jackpot with the same probability (1/280 for non-probable changes and 1/28 for probable changes) when the first special symbol is the subject of variable display. I do.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to one of the big hits shown in FIGS. If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 11-4 (A) to (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state, but to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol.

  Also, for example, when the present invention is applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a probable change state (high probability state) and then ends a probable change state based on execution of a predetermined number of times (probability change end times), the same probability change In the case of the number of times of termination, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of continuation of change (ratio of extended holidays) increases in the order of setting value “1” <setting value “2” <setting value “3”.

  Note that, in the present characteristic part 112IW, a total of three setting values 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited thereto. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 11-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Note that, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the case of determining the big hit type using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) A common jackpot type determination table is used for determining the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to use it, different tables may be provided so that the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different.

  The jackpot type determination table determines the type of the jackpot from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for the jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referred to to determine one of them.

  In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), a determination value corresponding to the random number (MR2) for the jackpot type determination is assigned to each set value. The ratio of the determined judgment value is shown. That is, the ratio of which one of the jackpot types A to C is determined for each set value is shown. Note that a determination value corresponding to a random number is actually assigned to a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-6 and a non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. In order to simplify, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is “1”, the ratio determined to the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is “2”, When the ratio determined to the big hit type B is high and the set value is “3”, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio determined to the big hit type A becomes high.

  Here, the big hit type in the present feature portion 112IW will be described with reference to FIG. 11-5 (B). In the present feature portion 112IW, a fan fare period, an interval period, and an ending period in the big hit game are determined for each big hit type. Have been.

  The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the big hit opening process of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12 side, the start of the big hit game state is started. This is a period in which a fanfare effect as an effect operation to be notified is performed.

  The interval period is, for example, a period in which the post-big-hit opening process of step S116 is executed on the main substrate 11 side, and after the round in which the special winning opening is opened on the effect control substrate 12 side is ended, This is a period in which an interval effect as an effect operation for notifying the start of the round is performed.

  The ending period is, for example, a period during which the big hit end process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period to be done.

  As shown in FIG. 11-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the big hit type A, the longest in the case of the big hit type B, and the longest in the case of the big hit type C. It is set to be shorter.

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 112IW, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of being determined to be the big hit type C is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively long because the ratio determined to be the big hit type A is high. Therefore, the average value of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The present feature section 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit increases in the order of “1” <“2” <“3”, but at the same time, the setting value is “1”. The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period is configured to be longer in the order of “<2” <“3”. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) is set high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling Can be prevented from becoming too high.

  The feature section 112IW is configured to be able to execute a jackpot suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during the jackpot game. The jackpot suggestion effect is performed in a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period. Executable in the period. With such a configuration, interest in the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be enhanced. Further, by directing the player's interest to the suggestion effect during the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

  In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly executed.

  In addition, in the feature section 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each big hit type, and the ratio of which big hit type is determined for each set value is different. When the winning probability (ball-out rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the determination values are set such that the ratio of selection of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which the relatively long periods are set is high in the order of the big hit types A <B <C. Thus, the average value of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be made longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  In this feature section 112IW, in each of the big hit types A to C, the time saving control and the probable change control executed after the end of the big hit game state are performed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present feature section 112IW). The game is terminated when the figure game is executed or the jackpot game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. May be performed. In the case of such a specific big hit type, a big hit game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state. The characteristic portion 112IW is configured such that the ratio of the jackpot is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition to or in place of such a configuration, the probability change continuation is performed for each set value. The rates (rensole rates) may be different.

  In addition, in the feature section 112IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence or absence of the time saving control and the probability change control, the number of controls, and the like) in the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C. Although the average period of the period and the ending period is configured to be different, for example, for each big hit type, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence or absence of time saving control and probable change control, the number of times of control are different, and the degree of advantage is different. You may do so. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each big hit type, or may be the same regardless of the big hit type.

  Note that the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a mode in which the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is determined at a different ratio from the big hit type A, the big hit type B, and the big hit type C according to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C that cannot be determined is one or more. There may be more than one. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value that has been set means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or that the specific jackpot type is 100%. Deciding on a percentage is included.

  In addition, in the present characteristic part 112IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are different depending on the type of the big hit has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending time regardless of the big hit type. You may comprise so that periods may differ. For example, according to which of the set values “1” to “3”, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period according to the set value may be determined uniformly. Further, for example, according to which of the set values “1” to “3”, a lottery process is performed with a selection probability according to the set value, and a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period are determined. May be.

  As described above, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is the big hit varies depending on the set value, so that the gaming interest can be improved. .

  In the present feature section 112IW, the jackpot type is determined using the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The determination may be made using MR1 which is a random number for determination.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous to the player (the larger the jackpot probability, the easier it is to determine the jackpot type C as the jackpot type, etc.). Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be, the more advantageous the player is.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the big hit probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the gaming property itself does not change. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the gaming properties may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a gaming property in which the probability loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and a game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While the game state after the end of the big hit game is controlled to be in a certain state based on passing through the predetermined count switch, the rate at which the game balls pass through the count switch during the big hit game differs depending on the big hit type. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a set value of 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, and the gaming ball is set during the high base (during time saving control). Or as a game of controlling the jackpot gaming state based on passing a predetermined count switch provided special variable winning ball device 7 (the so-called one two-kind mixed type). Furthermore, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as that of 1-3, the big hit probability is higher than the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3, while the big hit game is in progress. (For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

  Further, when changing the playability in accordance with the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable prize ball device 7 is switched to a production switch (a game ball passes through the count switch). When the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is used as a game switch (when a game ball is set). It may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a certain change state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch.

(Variation pattern judgment table)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. Is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a large hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “big hit”, and a variation display result of “loss” A loss variation pattern determination table used when predetermined is determined is prepared in advance.

(Loss variation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram of the loss variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic section 112IW, a period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) from when the setting change is performed at the time of turning on the power until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times), and other periods ( (Hereinafter also referred to as a non-special period).

  Specifically, during the special period, the variation pattern is determined using the first loss variation pattern determination table illustrated in FIG. 11-6 (A), and during the non-special period, the variation pattern is determined as illustrated in FIG. 11-6 (B). The variation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. Note that in the present characteristic unit 112IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed at power-on to the time when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times) is a special period, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special period may be a period until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) regardless of whether the setting is changed when the power is turned on. In addition, a special period may be set in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am) using a real-time clock or the like. Further, a period until the first big hit occurs may be set as the special period.

  In the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-6A and 11B, both the normal reach and the super reach lose are set in the order of “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned such that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of the normal reach and the super reach differs according to the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the normal reach and the super reach are executed.

  Also, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-6 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The determination value is assigned such that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between the two becomes large. With such a configuration, the difference in the frequency at which the normal reach is executed becomes easier to recognize in the special period than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), and therefore, the motivation to play the game in the special period Can be given to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

  Note that, for example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern thereof) is determined at the same ratio regardless of the difference in the set value (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may make it. By doing so, the execution ratio of only a specific variation pattern (in this example, normal reach loss) differs according to the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the specific variation pattern is executed. become. Conversely, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be changed according to the set value.

  In addition, the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss depending on the set value at times other than non-reach loss. The determination values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, normal reach loss: balance of super reach loss) differs. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table illustrated in FIG. 11A, the ratio of the normal reach loss becomes significantly higher in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3” (this example). Specifically, the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-6 (B) shows the normal reach loss in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”. Is slightly increased (in this example, increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. Further, the difference in the selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

  In the present feature unit 112IW, setting suggestion effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set value. This is because the execution ratio of the entire normal reach loss and the super reach loss differs according to the set value, and depending on the set value. The concept includes that the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different, and that the execution ratios of only the normal reach loss are different depending on the set value.

  The feature unit 112IW displays a common background image on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and (B) is used. Then, the effect symbols are changed and displayed. Further, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner. The dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or during a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance amusement of a game during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times).

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature portion 112IW. For example, a special variation pattern suggesting a set value (for example, a variation pattern in which the variation display of the effect symbol is different from a normal pattern and the set value is 1 or 2) Is selected only during the special period, so that the special variation pattern can be selected only during the special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

(Non-reach loss variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram of the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table. In this characteristic portion 112IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are provided, and when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be any of non-reach loss A to C. Is configured. The configuration is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the non-reach loss A to C is included in the loss variation pattern determination table illustrated in FIG. May be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 11-7, in the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table, when the set value is “1”, the ratio determined as the non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is “2”. ", The ratio determined as non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is" 3 ", the ratio determined as non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is increased. Is assigned a judgment value.

  In the present feature unit 112IW, when the set value is “1”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so that the fluctuation time during non-reach loss is likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so that the fluctuation time during non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The present feature section 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit increases in the order of “1” <“2” <“3”, but at the same time, the setting value is “1”. "<2" <"3" so that the average fluctuation time becomes longer. With such a configuration, when the winning probability of a big hit (the payout rate) is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling property becomes too high. Can be prevented.

  The characteristic portion 112IW is configured so that the average fluctuation time is different by changing the ratio of any of the non-reach losses A to C having different fluctuation times according to the set value. A plurality of types of variation patterns other than the reach loss (for example, normal reach loss and super reach loss) may be provided so that the variation time is different, and the selection ratio may be different depending on the set value. When a plurality of types of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss and super reach loss) are provided so that the variation time is different, the time of the swing display or the high-speed variation display of the effect design is made different, and the effect of the effect or the like is changed. It is desirable that there be no difference in appearance.

  In addition, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different according to the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the fixed effect symbol (final The period in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the winning probability of a big hit (the payout rate) is set to be high, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the fixed effect symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed, that is, to delay the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 112IW, the fluctuation time is set for each of the non-reach loss A to C, and the ratio of determining the non-reach loss A to C is different for each set value, so that the big hit is won. When the probability (the payout rate) is set to a high value, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. However, the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration, but may be set for each set value. May be fixedly set, and the setting in which the jackpot winning probability (yield rate) is higher may cause the fluctuation time to be longer.

  Note that, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, a variation pattern for shortening the variation time is provided compared to other variation patterns. For example, a fluctuation pattern of a shortened non-reach loss (a fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds) having a fluctuation time shorter than the non-reach loss A (a fluctuation time of 9 seconds) is provided. The shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, 3). With such a configuration, when the number of reserved storages reaches the upper limit or is in a state close to the upper limit, this state is resolved and the fluctuation display is performed efficiently (that is, the game proceeds efficiently). ). Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is equal to or more than the predetermined number. For this reason, in the feature section 112IW, the fluctuation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or more than the predetermined number has a common fluctuation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature section 112IW, the variation time for the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number may be varied according to the set value.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In the feature section 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning port (large winning port, second large winning port, first starting winning port, second starting winning port, general winning port) is determined. The tallying can be performed, and various winning information such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, the base and the like can be calculated.

  Specifically, the display monitor 112IW029 includes a four-digit display unit. The display portion of each digit is composed of seven segments each composed of seven segments drawing the character “8” and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments.

  The display contents are displayed on the first digit display unit and the second digit display unit, and the numerical values are displayed as percentages on the third digit display unit and the fourth digit display unit. In display No. 1, a short-term connection ratio is displayed, and in display No. 2, a short-term winning ratio is displayed. In the display No. 3, the total ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 4, the total winning combination is displayed. Display No. 5 displays the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls, and display No. 6 displays the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. Is done.

  Here, the short term means a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) is 6,000. The period in which the total sum is obtained means the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio is once reset.

  In the above example, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated without depending on the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the repetition ratio may be a percentage of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning in the special winning opening during the jackpot game state. The winning combination is defined as a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls due to winning in the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls due to winning in the large winning opening in the jackpot game state. Is also good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the first digit display unit and the second digit display unit, and when the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, “Y7.” Is displayed on the first digit display portion and the second digit display portion. When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display unit and the fourth digit display unit, and the short-term duty ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. Is displayed, the short-term role ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display portion and the fourth digit display portion.

  When the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the first digit display portion and the second digit display portion, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed. "A7." Is displayed on the first digit display portion and the second digit display portion. When the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display portion and the fourth digit display portion, and the total of the display No. 4 is displayed. When the total winning combination is displayed, the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display portion and the fourth digit display portion.

  When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the first digit display portion and the second digit display portion, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, one digit is displayed. “B6.” Is displayed on the eye display unit and the second digit display unit. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. When displayed, the total cumulative winning combination is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display portion and the fourth digit display portion.

  Further, the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 is based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030 based on the set value set at that time. It is possible to sequentially change the display to short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative connection ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2.

  In the characteristic section 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The monitor 112IW029 may be able to display only one numerical value or only any two numerical values among these connection ratio, combination ratio, and base.

  Further, the present characteristic part 112IW exemplifies a mode in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to display the history of the awarded number of awarded balls on the display monitor 112IW029 without calculating the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Good.

(Setting change processing)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic section 112IW will be described. FIG. 11-8 and FIG. 11-9 are flowcharts showing a game control main process in the characteristic unit 112IW. In the present characteristic unit 112IW, the processing of steps 112IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

  After the initial setting, the CPU 103 waits for activation of the effect control means for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. The timer is set (step 112 IWS003). In this case, a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the effect control CPU 120 is set in the effect control means activation wait timer. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and checks whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control unit activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 112IWS004, and the processing of steps 112IWS004 to S005 is repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control unit activation waiting timer is 0, the flow shifts to step 112IWS006.

  By executing the processing of steps 112 IWS 003 to S 005, the processing after step 112 IWS 006 is executed after the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, the RAM is initialized and restored, and the like. Is done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands, such as a setting value command, an initialization designation command, and a command at the time of recovery, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the command is not lost. This can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets, for example, a factory setting flag indicating that the setting at the time of factory shipment remains in the RAM 102 (for example, this flag is cleared even when RAM clear processing 1 and 2 and recovery processing described later are executed). Is not set, and is cleared when a setting change process described later is executed). In step 112IWS006, it is determined whether or not this factory setting flag is set. do it. Not limited to such a mode, for example, a value (for example, “0” or “−”) indicating that it is the factory default is set as the set value, and the value of the set value is set in step 112IWS006. May be checked whether the value remains at the factory shipping value. If the settings at the time of factory shipment remain (step 112IWS006; Yes), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

  If the setting is not the factory setting (step 112 IWS006; No), that is, if the setting value has been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is stored (step 112IWS007). Specifically, in step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112 IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) by the same processing as in step S5, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not (step 112 IWS008). In step 112IWS008, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 checks whether or not a setting change flag indicating that the current set value is being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting change flag is set (step 112IWS009; Yes), that is, if power supply to the gaming machine is restarted due to a power interruption during the change of the set value, the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

  In step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 performs control of transmitting a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). Note that the CPU 103 may perform control to display a display (for example, display of “E”) indicating a RAM abnormality error on the display monitor 112IW029.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from door open sensor 112IW090 is on, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 112IW051 is on or not (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear 1 process (step 112IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 processing, the area other than the area for storing the performance display information such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the performance display such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is cleared. Information is retained without being cleared. In the RAM clear 1 processing, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, control goes to a step 112IWS027.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is off (N in step 112IWS011), when the setting key 112IW051 is off (N in step 112IWS012), or when the output signal from the clear switch is off (N in step 112IWS012). In step 112IWS013, N), the process does not proceed to step 112IWS014, but proceeds to the loop process.

  By performing the processing of steps 112IWS006 to S014, in the present feature unit 112IW, if the backup RAM is not normal (N in steps 112IWS007 and S008), or if the factory default settings are maintained (step In the case of 112IWS006, if a power interruption or the like occurs during the setting change (step 112IWS009, Y), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 opened. The RAM is cleared on condition that the setting value is changed, and the set value can be changed after step 112 IWS027. On the other hand, unless the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop processing is executed, the set value cannot be changed, and the game control does not proceed.

  If the setting change flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from door open sensor 112IW090 is on, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 112IW051 is on or not (step 112IWS017). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing start command indicating that the setting confirmation processing is to be started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS018). Upon receiving the setting confirmation processing start command, the effect control board 12 performs control to notify that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R). Or emits a decorative illuminant such as a decorative LED in a predetermined manner).

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

  Upon completion of the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 112IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply by the same process as step S6. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing end command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been completed to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS021). Then, control goes to a step 112IWS034.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS016) or when the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as step S6. Accordingly, a recovery process (step 112 IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply is performed. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 by the same processing as in step S7 (step 112IWS023). Then, control goes to a step 112IWS034.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 112 IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 processing, an area other than an area for storing performance display information such as a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base and an area for storing a set value among the storage areas of the RAM 102 are cleared. Information for performance display such as the winning combination and the base, and the information of the set value are retained without being cleared. In the game control main process shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, when it is determined that the output signal from the clear switch is on, the RAM clear process (RAM clear 2 process) is immediately executed. However, when it is determined that the output signal from the clear switch is on, a flag indicating that the clear switch is on is set in advance, and processing necessary at the time of startup (the door open sensor 112IW090 or the setting key) is performed. After executing 112IW051 confirmation, setting confirmation processing, setting change processing, etc.), it may be determined whether or not the flag is set, and if it is set, RAM clear processing may be executed.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS025). If the output signal from door open sensor 112IW090 is on, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 112IW051 is on or not (step 112IWS026). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets the setting change flag (step 112IWS027).

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change processing start command indicating that the setting change processing is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS028). Upon receiving the setting change processing start command, the effect control board 12 performs control to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is output from the speakers 8L and 8R). Or emits a decorative illuminant such as a decorative LED in a predetermined manner).

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process (step 112IWS029).

  When the setting change processing is completed, the CPU 103 resets the setting change flag (step 112IWS030). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). In addition, a setting change processing end command indicating that the setting change processing has ended is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS032). Then, control goes to a step 112IWS034.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS025) or when the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as step S9. Transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS033). Then, control goes to a step 112IWS034.

  Note that, in the present characteristic unit 112IW, the processing of steps 112IWS034 to S036 is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

  Next, the setting confirmation processing (step 112IWS019) will be described. FIG. 11-10 (A) is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

  In the setting confirmation processing, the CPU 103 first specifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSA01).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSA02). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA03). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSA02, and the processing of steps 112IWSA02 to SA03 is repeatedly executed. In other words, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open and the setting key 112IW051 is on.

  If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes a setting confirmation error process (step 112IWSA04). Then, the process proceeds to a loop process. In step 112IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating a setting check error, and execute the setting check error notification based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by lighting an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. In this example, when the setting confirmation error processing is executed, the processing shifts to the loop processing, so that the error state is continued until the power is turned on again, so that the processing does not proceed.

  If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA05). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the process of step 112IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting confirmation processing ends.

  Next, the setting change process (step 112 IWS029) will be described. FIG. 11-10 (B) is a flowchart showing the setting change process (step 112 IWS029).

  In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first specifies the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified set value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB01).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting change switch 112IW052 is ON (step 112IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not on, the flow shifts to step 112IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting switch 112IW052 is ON (Y in step 112IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the set value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB03). For example, when “1” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 is updated to “2”, and when “2” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029. Updates the display on the display monitor 112IW029 to “3”, and when “3” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 may be updated to “1”. Further, the CPU 103 stores the set value (the set value after update) displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updates the set value already stored) (step 112IWSB04).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSB05). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB06). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB02, and the processing of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 is repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open and the setting key 112IW051 is on, the processing of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 is repeatedly executed.

  If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes a setting change error process (step 112IWSB07). Then, the process proceeds to a loop process. In step 112IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating a setting change error, and execute the setting change error notification based on the reception of the command by the effect control CPU 120. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by lighting an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting change error processing is executed, the processing shifts to the loop processing, so that the error state is continued until the power is turned on again so that the processing does not proceed. In this case, since the setting change flag is still set in step 112IWS027, the RAM clear 1 process is executed after the power is turned on again (see Y in step 112IWS009 and 112IWS014), and The error state will be released.

  If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB08). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the process of step 112IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting change process ends.

  Note that the specified setting value may be displayed on the image display device 5 in step 112ISWSA01 of the setting confirmation process. Further, the specified setting value may be displayed on the image display device 5 in the 112IWSB01 of the setting change process. Then, the subsequent processing may be executed using the image display device 5.

  In addition, during the execution of the setting confirmation processing and the setting change processing shown in FIGS. 11-10, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are not displayed during the normal game (for example, all the segments of the 7-segment LED are turned on or blinked). Mode). By notifying using the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B in this way, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the setting confirmation state or the setting change state. It should be noted that the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may be configured to be different between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state.

  If the power is turned off during the execution of the setting change processing shown in FIG. 11-10, the setting change processing is executed again, and the updated set values are stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM). As long as the setting change is not completed, an error may occur. Specifically, at the start of the setting change process, the setting change flag (not erased even when the RAM is cleared) is stored in the same backup RAM as the backup RAM for storing the set value, and at the end of the setting change process, When the flag is turned off and a process other than the setting change process (for example, the game control main process) is executed, if the setting change flag is on, an error is generated. As described above, in a situation where the setting change process does not proceed normally on the way, the clerk at the game hall may mistakenly think that the setting change has been completed even though it has not been completed. In such a case, if the setting change is not completed, an error occurs, so that the complete completion of the setting change can be secured.

  Also, in steps 112IWSA01 and 112IWSB01 of FIG. 11-10, the current set value is read from the backup RAM, and the set value is displayed. However, when the backup to the backup RAM is not performed normally, information indicating an error is displayed on the image display device 5 and the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are displayed in a mode different from that during the normal game. (For example, a mode in which all the segments of the 7-segment LED are turned off, a mode in which all the segments are turned on if the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are all turned on).

  FIG. 11-11 is an explanatory diagram of the processing executed when the power is turned on. In the present feature section 112IW, as shown in FIG. 11-11, when the setting key 112IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (and when the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting change process (steps 112IWS005 to S010) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process (steps 112IWS015 to S017) is executed. When the setting key 112IW051 is off when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, an initialization process (step S8) is performed. If the clear switch is off, a recovery process (step S6) is performed. Be executed.

  Next, a display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change processing will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 (A) and 11-12 (B), when the power is turned off (turned off) by the operation of a game clerk or the like, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends. In addition, when the big win is opened at the timing of turning off the power, such as during a big hit game, the supply of power to the solenoid 82 is stopped to close the big win.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11C, when a clerk of the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting is satisfied, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

  In the state where the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 112IW052 by the store clerk of the game arcade or the like. The numerical values displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 are sequentially updated (for example, each time the setting switch 112IW052 is operated, updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 →...).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11E, the CPU 103 changes the setting value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 to the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 112IW051 has been turned off by an operation of a game hall clerk or the like. (Update storage) in the backup area. At this time, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 112IW029 to display the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative connection ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, The base 1 and the base 2 are displayed. Further, when the reserved storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserved storage is cleared. In addition, when the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 11A (timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), when the setting is changed, the RAM clear processing is executed. Because the memory about the big hit is erased, the big winning opening remains closed. Thereafter, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process, and enters a state in which a game can be played, that is, a state in which a variation display result, a jackpot type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11F, the CPU 103 displays “EEEE” on the display monitor 112IW029 based on the occurrence of an error in the RAM 102 in which the setting value is stored. It is possible to do.

  Note that, in the setting change process in the feature unit 112IW, a mode in which the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as an initial display displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change processing is the most unfavorable setting value for the player (“1” in the case of the present feature section 112IW) or the most advantageous setting value for the player. The set value (“3” in the case of the present feature unit 112IW) may be displayed.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the feature section 112IW will be described. FIGS. 11-13 and 11-14 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total number of reserved storages (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) (step 112IWS101). For example, the count value of a total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

  If the total reserved storage count is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved storage count is 0 (step 112IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is 0. If the second reserved number is not 0, the CPU 103 sets a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to "2" (step 112 IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 112IWS104).

  By performing the processing of steps 112IWS102 to S104, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with higher priority than the variable display of the first special symbol. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuated according to the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port. May be executed.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 112 IWS 105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 sets each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 112 IWS 106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by one, and sets the value of each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift content. When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by one, and the content of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer is shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 stores the first reserved storage buffer in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4). Each of the stored random numbers is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved storages = n-1. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each of the numbers stored in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers (or the respective second reserved storage numbers) are always the first reserved storage number (or (The number of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, and 4.

  Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total number of pending storages by one. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step 112 IWS 107). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 112 IWS 108). As described above, in the present characteristic unit 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed at the time of power-on by executing the process of step 112 IWS011, but the step value is also transmitted after the power-on. A set value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of the 112 IWS 108.

  Even if the same variation pattern is used, if different variation pattern commands are transmitted for each set value, variation pattern commands of the total number of variation patterns × the number of set values (3 in this example) are required. And the data capacity may be increased. Therefore, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a set value command is transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only variation pattern commands corresponding to the specific variation pattern are provided with variation pattern commands for the number of set values. Good. In this case, for example, the setting value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation having the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation has the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the number of the setting values. May be provided.

  In this example, the same setting value command is transmitted as the setting value command transmitted at power-on (see step 112IWS011) and the setting value command transmitted at the start of fluctuation (see step 112IWS108). The embodiment is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to configure the set value command for power-on and the set value command for start of fluctuation as separate commands, and to transmit different set value commands between power-on and start of fluctuation. Good.

  Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of the fluctuation is shown. However, it is configured to transmit the effect control command which combines the fluctuation pattern command and the set value command. Is also good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted when the set value is “1”, and when the variation value is “2”, The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and when the set value is “3”, the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

  In addition, the microcomputer 100 for game control is configured to be able to output the same variation pattern command (for example, variation pattern command A) irrespective of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 side determines which set value it is. A configuration may be adopted in which one of the variation patterns is selected and the selection ratio is made different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is increased. The selection may be performed at a ratio, or if the set value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high ratio. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 have the same variation time, but may be configured so that the presence / absence of a pseudo run, the number of pseudo runs, the presence / absence of reach, and the type are different. In this case, for example, when the set value command is not normally received, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected. When the set value command is not normally received, a dedicated selection ratio is used. May be used to select a variation pattern.

  Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the change is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the change.

  In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current game state (step 112IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probable change state background designation command when in the probable change state, and controls to transmit a time reduction state background designation command when it is in the time reduction state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control for transmitting the normal state background designation command is performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination from the random number buffer area, and executes the big hit determination module. The jackpot determination module is a program that performs a process of comparing a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 11-4) with the random number value MR1, and determining that a match is determined if they match. That is, it is a program for executing the process of determining a big hit.

  If the random number value MR1 does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step 112IWS110), the process proceeds to step 112IWS116.

  If the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 112IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 112IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 11-5) to match the type corresponding to the value of the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A”). , "Big hit type B" or "big hit type C") is determined as the big hit type (step 112 IWS 114).

  Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 112 IWS 115). For example, when the big hit type is “big hit type A”, “01” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “big hit type B”, “02” is set as the data showing the big hit type. When the big hit type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol (step 112IWS116). For example, when the big hit flag is not set, "-" which is a lost symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. For example, when the big hit flag is set, the big hit symbol “7” is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. It should be noted that a different special symbol may be determined as a stop symbol depending on the big hit type.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 112IWS117).

The present invention 112IW includes the following first invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling may be too high when the setting is high. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the first invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, and the like) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 11-5).
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the first invention for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, and the like) differs depending on a set value (for example, see FIG. 11-5).
further,
At least a first numerical value display area (for example, an interface area 18SG005I including a normal timer or an ART remaining game number display area in the modified example 156SG-1) and a second numerical display area (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer) And display means (for example, the image display device 5) having the remaining game number display area of the additional zone in the modified example 156SG-1.
A predetermined effect that updates a numerical value in at least one of the first numerical value display region and the second numerical value display region to a specific value (for example, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect, or an additional game in the modification 156SG-1) The number is added to the number of remaining games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone), and a special effect (for example, shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A)) for suggesting the predetermined effect. As described above, the effect execution means (for example, a part that notifies the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect with the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B) (for example, Effect control CPU 120);
With
The effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect on the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area as the special effect (for example, FIG. 10). -22 (A), FIG. 10-23 (A), and FIG. 10-24 (A), the normal timer effect period, the special timer effect period, the normal timer effect period, and the special timer effect period. As shown in the portion in which the sum value is reported in the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, or as shown in Modification 156-1, the number of additional games is the remaining game number of ART and the additional zone of ART. The game machine is characterized in that it is added to both of the number of remaining games.) According to this feature, the gambling property becomes too high. It is possible to prevent that the Mau. In addition, as a special effect, an effect can be executed with the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area as suggestion targets, so that the entertainment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the first invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state differs according to the set value (for example, see FIG. 11-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the first invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state differs according to the set value (for example, see FIG. 11-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 4 of the first invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state differs according to the set value (for example, see FIG. 11-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the first invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming value,
A game value assigning means for assigning a game value based on the satisfaction of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value provided by the game value provision means to be larger than the first set value in the magnitude of the game value used for the game. A second setting value (for example, setting value 1) in which the occupying ratio increases, and
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (for example, FIGS. 11-5 (A) and (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 6 of the first invention,
It is described that a suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect indicating a set value (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit) may be provided in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state, According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance interest in the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 7 of the first invention,
It is provided with an effect execution means capable of executing an effect,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) regardless of the set value during a predetermined control period in the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance interest in the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 8 of the first invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be set in advance in accordance with the set value, and according to such a configuration, gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 9 of the first invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a plurality of advantageous states,
The game control means can control one of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, big hit types A to C) at different rates based on the set value,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state differs according to the type of the advantageous state (for example, see FIG. 11-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 10 of the first invention,
A game machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first winning opening, the second winning opening 712). A game value providing means for providing a game value (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing in S12);
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information related to a game value provided by the game value provision means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 12, a portion that can display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The correspondence between the means 2 to the means 10 and the means 1 of the first invention described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means 2 to the means 10 and the means A.

In addition, the present invention 112IW includes the following second invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling may be too high when the setting is high. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value,
A predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to variable display differs depending on the set value that has been set (for example, see FIG. 11-7).
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the second invention for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value,
The predetermined control period (for example, the variable time) related to the variable display differs according to the set value (for example, see FIG. 11-7).
further,
At least a first numerical value display area (for example, an interface area 18SG005I including a normal timer or an ART remaining game number display area in the modified example 156SG-1) and a second numerical display area (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer) And display means (for example, the image display device 5) having the remaining game number display area of the additional zone in the modified example 156SG-1.
A predetermined effect that updates a numerical value in at least one of the first numerical value display region and the second numerical value display region to a specific value (for example, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect, or an additional game in the modification 156SG-1) The number is added to the number of remaining games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone), and a special effect (for example, shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A)) for suggesting the predetermined effect. As described above, the effect execution means (for example, a part that notifies the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect with the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B) (for example, Effect control CPU 120);
With
The effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect on the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area as the special effect (for example, FIG. 10). -22 (A), FIG. 10-23 (A), and FIG. 10-24 (A), the normal timer effect period, the special timer effect period, the normal timer effect period, and the special timer effect period. As shown in the portion in which the sum value is reported in the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, or as shown in Modification 156-1, the number of additional games is the remaining game number of ART and the additional zone of ART. The game machine is characterized in that it is added to both of the number of remaining games.) According to this feature, the gambling property becomes too high. It is possible to prevent that the Mau. In addition, as a special effect, an effect can be executed with the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area as suggestion targets, so that the entertainment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the second invention,
The variable display period differs according to the set value (for example, see FIG. 11-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the second invention,
It is described that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be made different depending on the set value, and such a configuration may result in too much gambling. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 4 of the second invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming value,
A game value assigning means for assigning a game value based on the satisfaction of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value provided by the game value provision means to be larger than the first set value in the magnitude of the game value used for the game. A second setting value (for example, setting value 1) in which the occupying ratio increases, and
The predetermined control period for the variable display is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (for example, see FIG. 11-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 5 of the second invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period for the variable display may be set in advance in accordance with the set value, and according to such a configuration, gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 6 of the second invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern,
A variable display execution unit that executes variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination unit,
The variable display pattern determination means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different rates according to the set values (for example, see FIG. 11-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 7 of the second invention,
A game machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first winning opening, the second winning opening 712). A game value providing means for providing a game value (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing in S12);
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information related to a game value provided by the game value provision means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 12, a portion that can display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The correspondence between the means 2 to the means 7 and the means 1 of the second invention described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means 2 to the means 7 and the means A.

  Note that the configuration shown by the characteristic portion 112IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by another characteristic portion such as the characteristic portion 31AK to form a gaming machine. For example, when performing the pre-game suggestion effect, the game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect indicated by the characteristic portion 112IW, a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the pre-game suggestion effect, the game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect. At the same time, a title corresponding to the pre-game suggestion effect, the game suggestion effect, or the big hit suggestion effect may be configured to be notified in the same manner as the characteristic portion 31AK.

(Explanation of the characteristic part 248F to the characteristic part 250F)
Next, the characteristic portions 248F to 250F will be described. The characteristic portion 248F has a characteristic relating to the continuation rate suggestion effect, the characteristic portion 249F has a characteristic relating to the setting suggestion effect pattern A, and the characteristic portion 250F has a characteristic relating to the setting suggestion effect pattern B.

(About specifications)
FIG. 12A is a diagram for explaining specifications at each set value. As shown in FIG. 12A, in setting 1, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probable change is 1/319, the jackpot probability at the time of probable change is 1/95, and the ST continuation rate is 65.29%. In setting 2, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probable change is 1/280, the jackpot probability at the time of probable change is 1/75, and the ST continuation rate is 73.87%. In setting 3, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probable change is 1/250, the jackpot probability at the time of probable change is 1/60, and the ST continuation rate is 81.37%. Here, the ST continuation rate indicates a probability that the ST state continues. The ST state refers to a state in which the probability change state is controlled after the big hit game state and is continued until a predetermined number of special figure games are executed. In the characteristic portions 248F to 250F, ST continues 100 times after the big hit game state. Note that the continuation rate is the probability of being repeatedly controlled to the jackpot gaming state, which is an advantageous state, the probability of being repeatedly controlled to the same gaming state (for example, probable change), and the probability of being repeatedly controlled to the high base state (for example, probable change, This is a concept including the probability of being controlled in the order of time saving and probability change.

  By setting the data shown in FIG. 12A, in the case of setting 1, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probable change, the jackpot probability at the time of probable change, and the ST continuation rate are the lowest among the set values. On the other hand, in the case of the setting 3, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probable change, the jackpot probability at the time of probable change, and the ST continuation rate are the highest among the set values. Therefore, the relationship of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 is advantageous to the player. The set value may be further provided in a plurality of stages, and may be provided, for example, in stages 1 to 6 so as to be advantageous to the player.

(About the flow of various effects of the characteristic part 248F to the characteristic part 250F)
FIG. 12B is a timing chart showing the flow of various effects. FIG. 12-2 (A) shows a flow of a continuation rate suggestion effect which is an effect of the characteristic portion 248F, and FIG. 12-2 (B) shows a flow of a setting suggestion effect (pattern A) which is an effect of the characteristic portion 249F. FIG. 12C shows a flow of a setting suggestion effect (pattern B) which is an effect of the characteristic portion 250F.

  First, the continuation rate suggestion effect, which is the effect of the characteristic portion 248F, illustrated in FIG. The continuation rate suggestion effect is an effect that suggests a continuation rate of ST that differs for each set value. Since the continuation rate is different for each set value, suggesting the continuation rate means, in other words, suggesting the set value. As shown in FIG. 12-2 (A), the continuation rate suggestion effect is an effect executed in the ending period after the big hit game state. After the big hitting game state ends, information such as entry into the ST and the number of acquired balls is displayed to the player as a video for a predetermined period. A continuation rate suggestion effect may be executed during the ending period. Thereafter, the ST state continues for 100 fluctuations as the ST period.

  Next, a setting suggestion effect (pattern A) which is an effect of the characteristic portion 249F shown in FIG. 12B will be described. The setting suggestion effect is an effect that indicates to which of the set values in a plurality of levels the value is set. In the setting suggestion effect of the pattern A, when the big hit gaming state is controlled during the variable display of 1 to 20 rotations, which is the early number of times, out of 100 ST periods after the end of the big hit gaming state and the ending period. A setting suggestion effect is executed during the round. In the setting suggestion effect of the pattern A, the setting suggestion effect is not executed when a big hit occurs between the variable displays of 21 to 100 rotations. That is, in the setting suggestion effect of the pattern A, during the ST period that is advantageous to the player, when the game is controlled to the big hit game state at any number of the 1st to 20th rotations, any one of the 21st to 100th rotations is performed. It can be said that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is higher (100: 0 ratio) than when the number of times is controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  Next, a setting suggestion effect (pattern B), which is an effect of the characteristic portion 250F, illustrated in FIG. In the pattern B, a setting suggestion effect is executed similarly to the pattern A. In the setting suggestion effect of the pattern B, the period of the variable display of 1 to 20 rotations, which is the early number, is the first setting suggestion effect period, out of the 100 ST periods after the end of the big hit game state and the ending period. I have. The setting suggestion effect is executed during the round when the game is controlled to the big hit game state by the variable display during the first setting suggestion effect period. In the setting suggestion effect of the pattern B, the period of the variable display of 21 to 100 rotations in the ST period is the second setting suggestion effect period. The setting suggestion effect is executed during the round when the big hit game state is controlled by the variable display during the second setting suggestion effect period. Here, in the first setting suggestion effect period and the second setting suggestion effect period, the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect executed when controlled to the big hit game state is different. In addition, during the ST period that is advantageous to the player, when the state is controlled to the big hit game state in the first setting suggestion effect period of the 1st to 20th rotation, the big hit game is performed in the second setting suggestion effect period of the 21st to 100th rotation. The execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the state is controlled.

  Here, in a gaming machine having no set value, the continuation rate of the ST state is constant. Therefore, even if a continuation rate suggestion effect is performed on such a gaming machine, it is not interesting. However, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (A), the continuation rate suggestion effect that suggests the probability of being controlled to the big hit gaming state in the ST state to the player is performed on the gaming machine having the set value. Attention can be given to the suggested effects, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The continuation rate suggestion effect is an effect that is executed during an ending period in which a relatively long time can be taken. Therefore, attention can be paid at the end of the big hit gaming state, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The setting suggestion effect of the pattern A is executed during the round. By doing so, it is possible to focus attention on the round game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the round game.

  The setting suggestion effect of the pattern B is also executed during the round. By doing so, it is possible to focus attention on the round game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the round game.

(About the characteristic part 248F)
Next, the continuation rate suggesting effect, which is the effect of the characteristic portion 248F, will be described in detail. FIG. 12C is a diagram illustrating the continuation rate suggestion effect determination table. The continuation rate suggestion effect determination table is a table used in a continuation rate suggestion effect process or a hold consecutive effect process described later. Using the continuation rate suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not an effect is to be performed and, if so, which effect (character A, character B, character C or character D) is to be executed. The continuation rate suggestion effect determination table is stored in the ROM 121.

  As shown in the continuation rate suggestion effect determination table, in the setting 1, the ratio determined without the effect is 88%, the ratio determined by the character A is 5%, the ratio determined by the character B is 4%, and the character C is determined. Is 3%, and no ratio is determined for the character D (0%). In the setting 2, the ratio determined without the effect is 88%, the ratio determined by the character A is 3%, the ratio determined by the character B is 5%, the ratio determined by the character C is 4%, and the character D is determined. Is not determined (0%). In the setting 3, the ratio determined without the effect is 87%, the ratio determined by the character A is 3%, the ratio determined by the character B is 4%, the ratio determined by the character C is 5%, and the character D is determined. Is 1%.

  By setting the data shown in FIG. 12C, in the continuation rate suggestion effect processing, the ratio of selecting no effect is high, and the continuation rate suggestion effect is not easily executed. In addition, the ratio of the case where the effect is executed is “Character A> Character B> Character C” in the case of Setting 1, “Character B> Character C> Character A” in the case of Setting 2, and in the case of Setting 3. "Character C> Character B> Character A> Character D". In other words, since the appearance rate of the character varies depending on the set value, it is possible to suggest a different ST continuation rate for each set value from the aspect of the character. In addition, since the character D appears only in the most advantageous setting 3, the determined ratio of the character D is the lowest, but when the character D appears, it is determined that the setting 3 is the high setting. In addition, any character may be displayed at a rate of 100% without being determined without the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 12C, the characters A to C can be executed regardless of the set values. Therefore, it is possible to more appropriately suggest the set values in the modes of these characters having different execution ratios, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12C, the effect mode of the continuation rate suggesting effect includes a character D that is determined to be set to the setting 3 of the high continuation rate. According to this, when the character D with a low execution ratio appears, the high setting is determined, so that the set value can be suitably suggested, and the interest of the game is improved.

  FIG. 12-4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the continuation rate suggestion effect process. The continuation rate suggestion effect process is a process executed in the ending effect process (S177).

  First, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit from the normal state (248FS001). Whether it is a so-called first hit, which is a big hit from the normal state, is determined based on a command for designating a gaming state. If the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is a big hit from the normal state (Y in 248FS001), the process ends. That is, the control is performed so that the continuation rate suggestion effect is not executed at the first hit. In addition, the continuation rate suggestion effect may be executed at the first hit. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the hit is not a big hit from the normal state (N in 248FS001), the effect content of the effect suggesting effect is determined by the effect suggestion effect determining table according to the set value. (248FS002) The processing moves to 248FS003.

  In 248FS003, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a continuation rate suggestion effect. If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the continuation rate suggestion effect is to be executed (Y in 248FS003), it is set to execute the determined continuation rate suggestion effect (248FS004), and the process ends. Thereby, it is set so that the continuation rate suggestion effect is executed in a predetermined period of the ending period. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the continuation rate suggestion effect (N in 248FS003), the process ends.

  The continuation rate suggestion effect is not necessarily executed when a predetermined period is reached when execution is determined, but may be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, even if the continuation rate suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B that can be operated by the player, the continuation rate suggestion effect is not executed unless the push button 31B is operated during the operable period. Good. In this way, the player's willingness to operate can be improved. When the continuation rate suggestion effect is performed using the operation means, a promotion image for promoting the operation of the operation means may be displayed, or the promotion image may not be displayed.

  Further, the continuation rate suggestion effect is often not executed, but the continuation rate suggestion effect by the characters A to D may be executed at a rate of 100%. Even in such a case, it is desirable that the appearance rate of the character D for which the setting 3 is determined be lower than the appearance rates of other characters. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the set value from being immediately distorted by the player.

  FIG. 12-5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the pending continuous production determination table and the production determination table when the continuous production is performed. These tables are stored in the ROM 121. In the characteristic portion 248F, a continuous holding effect may be executed. The hold continuous effect is to determine whether the hold storage information (hold information) which is a big hit is included in the hold storage information (hold information) relating to the variable display (whether the hold storage information is a hold draw). An effect of performing pre-reading processing and, when the retained storage information that becomes a big hit is included, an effect that suggests that the stored stored information that becomes a big hit (retained consecutive suggestion effect) is executed by the effect control CPU 120. It is. In the pending continuous production, a production using the same character as the above-described continuation rate suggestion production is executed. Then, the current setting value is suggested by the mode of the character executed in the held consecutive production.

  12-5 (A) is used to determine whether or not to execute the continuous holding effect when there is the big hit holding storage information. As shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), the rate at which the held continuous production is executed is set to 70%, and the ratio at which the reserved continuous production is not executed is set to 30%. In addition, when there is the hold storage information that becomes a big hit, the hold continuous effect may be executed at a rate of 100%.

  The production decision table with pending continuous production shown in FIG. 12-5 (B) indicates which production (character A, character B, character C or character D) to execute when it is determined to perform the continuous production. Is used to determine As shown in FIG. 12-5 (B), in the setting 1, the ratio determined for the character A is 30%, the ratio determined for the character B is 20%, the ratio determined for the character C is 10%, and the character is 10%. The ratio determined as D is set to be 40%. In the setting 2, the ratio determined for the character A is 10%, the ratio determined for the character B is 30%, the ratio determined for the character C is 20%, and the ratio determined for the character D is 40%. It is set to be. In setting 3, the ratio determined for character A is 10%, the ratio determined for character B is 20%, the ratio determined for character C is 30%, and the ratio determined for character D is 40%. It is set to be.

  According to the setting of the data shown in FIG. 12-5 (B), in the case of the held continuous production in the pending continuous production process, the ratio selected as the production to be executed is not limited to the character set at any set value. D is the highest, and its ratio is constant regardless of the set value. That is, the character D that appears only in the setting 3 of the continuation rate suggestion effect is not an effect suggesting the set value in the hold continuous effect. However, since the character D appears only with a very low probability when the continuation rate suggestion effect is executed, the effect appears at a high rate when the hold continuous effect is executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be. In addition, it can be said that the high setting is determined when the held ream is not obtained despite the appearance of the character D.

  Focusing on characters other than character D, the ratio selected as the effect to be executed is “character A> character B> character C” in the case of setting 1, and “character B> character C> character A” in the case of setting 2. In the case of setting 3, "character C> character B> character A". With such a setting, the set value is suggested by executing the hold consecutive effect.

  FIG. 12-6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the pending consecutive production process. The pending consecutive production process is a process executed in the ending production process (S177). First, effect control CPU 120 checks the inside of the hold storage buffer (248FS010), and determines whether or not there is a jackpot hold storage (248FS011). When the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is a jackpot hold storage (Y in 248FS011), the presence / absence of the hold continuous effect is determined by the hold continuous effect determination table (248FS012), and the process proceeds to 248FS013. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is no hold storage of the big hit (N in 248FS011), the process proceeds to 248FS015.

  In 248FS013, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the continuous holding effect. If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the continuous production effect is to be executed (Y in 248FS013), the effect content is determined by the production determination table with the presence of the continuous production effect (248FS014), and the process proceeds to 248FS016. Next, effect control CPU 120 sets to execute the determined content (248FS016), and ends the process. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the held continuous effect is not to be executed (N in 248FS013), the process proceeds to 248FS015.

  In 248FS015, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect contents using the continuation rate suggestion effect determination table. Here, the continuation rate suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 12C is used regardless of whether there is no jackpot hold storage or the case where the hold consecutive effect is not executed. Thereby, even in the case of a jackpot in which the pending consecutive effects are not executed, the lottery of the continuation rate suggestion effect is executed every time, so that the interest in the jackpot can be improved. Next, effect control CPU 120 sets to execute the determined content (248FS016), and ends the process.

  In addition, you may make it execute the above-mentioned continuation rate suggestion effect processing and continuation rate suggestion effect processing collectively in the same flow. In such a case, in the case of a big hit from the normal state, the continuous holding effect may not be executed.

  In addition, in the holding continuous production, a character similar to the continuation ratio production is made to appear. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved by combining the continuation ratio production and the reservation continuous production. It should be noted that different characters may be displayed for the pending consecutive production and the continuation rate suggestion production.

(About the setting suggestion effect performed in the feature unit 249F)
Next, a setting suggestion effect performed in the characteristic unit 249F will be described. FIG. 12-7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect operation of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 12-7 shows an example of a setting suggestion effect pattern A shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 12-7 (A), the image display device 5 performs an effect indicating that a big hit has occurred at the time of the big hit. In addition, a remaining number display 249F001 indicating the remaining number of changes is displayed at the upper right of the screen. The remaining number display decreases by one each time the variable display is executed once. FIG. 12-7 (A) shows a case where a big hit occurs in the remaining 97 rotations of the third rotation.

  Next, the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 12-7 (B) is executed during the period of the jackpot round. In the setting suggestion effect, a setting suggestion effect using the push button 31B is executed as the number of setting suggestion effects corresponding to the remaining number of times up to ST20. On the right side of the screen, a setting suggestion remaining image 249F002 indicating the number of remaining setting suggestion effects is displayed. Further, a button image 249F003 imitating the push button 31B is displayed at the center of the screen, and the number of remaining setting suggestion effects is indicated by characters “17 chances!” Above the button image 249F003. As described above, the number of hits as soon as possible during the ST period increases the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the person who wins the jackpot at the earliest frequency in the first to twentieth rotations of ST1 as a predetermined period is set suggestion. The effect execution ratio can be increased.

  FIG. 12C is a diagram illustrating a case where the setting suggestion effect has not been performed. As shown in FIG. 12-7 (C), when a pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is selected or when the push button 31B is not operated, the setting suggestion effect is not executed and what is displayed on the screen. Is not displayed. On the other hand, FIG. 12-7 (D) is a diagram illustrating a case where the setting suggestion effect has been executed. As shown in FIG. 12-7 (D), when the pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is executed is selected and the player operates the push button 31B, a character image 249F004 is displayed on the screen as the setting suggestion effect. You.

  Note that a plurality of types of button images 249F003 shown in FIG. 12-7 (B) may be provided. For example, a button image corresponding to the stick controller 31A may be provided, and when the stick controller 31A is operated, the ratio of appearance of the character image 249F004 may be higher than when the push button 31B is operated. When the button image corresponding to the stick controller 31A is displayed, the appearance ratio of any one of the plurality of types of character images 249F004 may be increased. For example, when the button image corresponding to the stick controller 31A is displayed, the character D indicating the high setting may appear at a high rate, or may appear (the character D is determined) without fail. Is also good. In addition, even if the number of the operation means is one, the appearance ratio of the character image that appears due to a change in the shape, color, or the like of the button image may be different.

  Further, the character image 249F004 shown in FIG. 12-7 (D) may appear two or more times because the setting suggestion effect using the button image 249F003 is executed a plurality of times. In such a case, when the second or subsequent character image 249F004 is displayed, it may be displayed in parallel with the character image 249F004 displayed by the previous operation. Further, the previous display may be updated to display a new character image 249F004. Further, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect may be increased by changing the display mode of the previous character image 249F004 (for example, the pose of the setting suggestion effect having a high reliability, the color of the clothes may be changed to the reliability value). Etc.) In addition, an effect may be provided in which the reliability is displayed as a percentage together with the plurality of character images 249F004, and the percentage display corresponding to the character image 249F004 corresponding to the actual set value is increased. With this configuration, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect can be improved in accordance with the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 12-8 is an explanatory diagram of the setting suggestion effect determination table. In the setting suggestion effect determination table, in the setting suggestion effect process, if there is a big hit within 1 to 20 rotations in the ST period, whether or not the setting suggestion effect is performed, and which effect (character A, This is a table used to determine whether to execute character B, character C, or character D). The setting suggestion effect determination table is stored in the ROM 121.

  As shown in the setting suggestion effect determination table, in setting 1, the ratio determined without the effect is 88%, the ratio determined for character A is 5%, the ratio determined for character B is 4%, and the character C is determined for character C. The determined ratio is 3%, and the character D has no determined ratio (0%). In the setting 2, the ratio determined without the effect is 88%, the ratio determined by the character A is 3%, the ratio determined by the character B is 5%, the ratio determined by the character C is 4%, and the character D is determined. Is not determined (0%). In the setting 3, the ratio determined without the effect is 87%, the ratio determined by the character A is 3%, the ratio determined by the character B is 4%, the ratio determined by the character C is 5%, and the character D is determined. Is 1%.

  By setting the data shown in FIG. 12-8, in the setting suggestion effect process, when a big hit occurs within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST, the ratio of selecting no effect is high, and the setting suggestion effect is hard to be executed. Has become. When the setting suggestion effect is executed, the ratio selected as the effect to be executed is “character A> character B> character C” in the case of setting 1, and “character B” in the case of setting 2. > Character C> Character A ”, and in the case of setting 3,“ Character C> Character B> Character A ”. That is, since the appearance rate of the character varies depending on the set value, it is possible to suggest the set value from the aspect of the character. In addition, since the character D appears only in the most advantageous setting 3, the determined ratio of the character D is the lowest, but when the character D appears, it is determined that the setting 3 is the high setting. In addition, any character may be displayed at a rate of 100% without being determined without the effect.

  FIG. 12-9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting suggestion effect process. The setting suggestion effect process is a process executed in the big hit effect process (S176). First, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a big hit has occurred within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST (249FS001). The effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a big hit has occurred within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST by confirming the number of times stored in the variation number counter for counting the number of variable displays during ST. judge. If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the hit is a big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST (Y in 249FS001), the effect content of the setting suggestion effect is determined by the setting suggestion effect determination table corresponding to the set value. It is determined (249FS002), and the process moves to 249FS003. On the other hand, if the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is no big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST (N in 249FS001), the process ends.

  In 249FS003, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect. If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed (Y in 249FS003), the effect is set to execute the setting suggestion effect according to the number of remaining STs (249FS004), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting suggestion effect is not to be executed (N in 249FS003), the process ends.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 12-9, the setting suggestion effect is provided when the jackpot is controlled at 1 to 20th rotation from the start of ST and when the jackpot is controlled at 21 to 100th rotation from the start of ST. The execution ratio is different (the setting suggestion effect is not executed at the 21st to 100th times). In this way, in the ST state, when the game is controlled to the big hit game state at any one of the first to twentieth rotations from the start of the ST, and when the big hit is made at any one of the first to twentieth rotations from the start of the ST. Since the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different from when the game state is controlled, it is possible to focus attention on the execution timing of the effect suggesting the setting, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In particular, when the big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotation from the start of ST, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the big hit is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotation from the start of ST (at the 21st to 100th rotation, Since the setting suggestion effect is not executed), the big hit game state is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, so that the big hit game state is continued, thereby increasing interest and paying attention to the execution of the setting suggestion effect. be able to.

  In addition, since the 21st to 100th rotation from the start of ST is the number of times after the 1st to 20th rotation, the big hit game is performed at the 1st to 20th rotation earlier than the 21st to 100th rotation when controlled to the ST state. Even if the state is controlled, it is possible to prevent the user from thinking that a loss has occurred (for example, the effect of watching only during ST cannot be sufficiently viewed).

  The period up to the 20th rotation after the start of ST is set as a period including the 1st to 20th rotations but not including the 21st to 100th rotations. With this configuration, it is possible to make the user pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the state is controlled to the big hit game state within the predetermined period. In addition, if the period until the 20th rotation or less after the start of ST is a special period in which the setting suggestion effect is likely to be executed when the game is controlled to the big hit game state, the effect is executed. Good. For example, in the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of ST, the background may be changed, or a telop indicating a special period may be displayed.

  In addition, including the 1st to 20th rotations, the 21st to 100th rotations are not performed by the same table, and the lottery of the setting suggestion effect is not performed by using a different table for each variable display or for a plurality of times. May be executed. In such a case, the earlier the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed and the higher the reliability may be.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 12-8, when the jackpot is controlled at the first to twentieth rotations from the start of ST, a setting with higher reliability than when the big hit is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of ST. Since the suggestion effect is executed (the setting suggestion effect is not executed at the 21st to 100th times), the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is high. The high reliability of the setting suggestion effect means that it becomes easy for the player to guess which setting value the setting difference becomes more remarkable. By doing so, it is possible to focus on the setting suggestion effect when the big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations in the ST state, and the interest of the game is improved.

(About the modification of the characteristic part 249F)
FIG. 12-10 is an explanatory diagram of a setting suggestion effect determination table according to a modification. Fig. 12-10 (A) shows a setting suggestion effect determination table for ST1 to 20 rotations, and Fig. 12-10 (B) shows a setting suggestion effect determination table for ST21 to 100 rotations. As shown in FIG. 12-10, in the modified example, different tables are used for ST1 to 20 rotations and ST21 to 100 rotations, but a setting suggestion effect is executed regardless of the number of changes. Further, in the modified example, a setting suggestion effect in which any character appears regardless of the number of times of the ST hitting a big hit is executed. These tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The setting suggestion effect determination table for ST1 to 20 rotations in FIG. 12-10 (A) indicates any setting suggestion effect (character A, character B, character C) when a big hit occurs within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST. Alternatively, it is a table used to determine whether to execute the character D). In setting 1, the ratio determined for character A is 50%, the ratio determined for character B is 30%, the ratio determined for character C is 20%, and the ratio determined for character D is no (0% is there). In setting 2, the ratio determined for character A is 20%, the ratio determined for character B is 50%, the ratio determined for character C is 30%, and the ratio determined for character D is no (0% is there). In setting 3, the ratio determined for character A is 20%, the ratio determined for character B is 30%, the ratio determined for character C is 40%, and the ratio determined for character D is 10%.

  The setting suggestion effect determination table for ST21 to 100 rotations in FIG. 12-10 (B) indicates any setting suggestion effect (character A) in the setting suggestion effect process when a big hit occurs within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. , Character B, character C, or character D). In setting 1, the ratio determined for character A is 40%, the ratio determined for character B is 30%, the ratio determined for character C is 30%, and the ratio determined for character D is no (0% is there). In setting 2, the ratio determined for character A is 30%, the ratio determined for character B is 40%, the ratio determined for character C is 30%, and the ratio determined for character D is no (0% is there). In the setting 3, the ratio determined for the character A is 30%, the ratio determined for the character B is 30%, the ratio determined for the character C is 35%, and the ratio determined for the character D is 5%.

  According to the data settings shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, in the setting suggestion effect process, if a big hit occurs from the start of ST to the end of ST, no effect is not selected. One of the effects is always executed. The ratio selected as the effect to be executed is different between 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST and 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. In the case of within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST, the ratio selected as the effect to be executed is “Character A> Character B> Character C” in setting 1, and “Character B” in setting 2. > Character C> Character A ”, and in the case of setting 3,“ Character C> Character B> Character A> Character D ”. In the case of within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST, the ratio selected as the effect to be executed is “character A> character B = character C” in the case of setting 1, and “ Character B> Character A = Character C ”, and in the case of setting 3,“ Character C> Character A = Character B> Character D ”.

  With such a setting, the character corresponding to the set value in both cases within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST and within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST is character A in setting 1, and character B in setting 2. In setting 3, the appearance rate of the character C is high. However, the appearance ratio of the character having the highest appearance ratio at each set value is higher in the case of 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST than in the case of 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. Therefore, it can be said that the reliability of the set value for the character is higher in the case of 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST than in the case of 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. Also, if the character D appears regardless of the number of changes, it is determined that the setting 3 is set. It should be noted that the effect content to be executed may be different between 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST and 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST.

(About the setting suggestion effect performed in the feature section 250F)
Next, a setting suggestion effect performed in the characteristic section 250F will be described. FIG. 12-11 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect operation of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 12-11 shows an example of the setting suggestion effect pattern B shown in FIG. 12-2 (C) when a big hit is made within the first to twentieth rotations and when a big hit is made within the ST21 to 100th rotations. ing. As shown in FIG. 12-11 (A) when a big hit is made within the first to twentieth rotations, an effect indicating that a big hit has been made at the time of the big hit is executed on the image display device 5. In addition, a remaining number display 250F001 indicating the remaining number of fluctuations is displayed at the upper right of the screen. The remaining number display decreases by one each time the variable display is executed once. FIG. 12-11 (A) shows a case where a big hit occurs in the remaining 97 rotations of the third rotation after the start of ST.

  Next, during the jackpot round, the first setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 12-11 (B) is executed. In the first setting suggestion effect, a dart effect in which the arrow image 250F002 is applied to the target image 250F004 on which “O” and “X” are drawn is executed. When a big hit occurs within the first to twentieth rotations of ST, an effect is executed in which the arrow can be thrown four times at any rotation speed. “4 chances!” At the top of the target image 250F004 is a character indicating that there is an effect that can throw an arrow four times. When the push button 31B is pressed while the button image 250F003 imitating the push button 31B displayed on the lower right of the screen is displayed, the arrow image 250F002 flies toward the target image 250F004.

  FIG. 12C is a diagram illustrating a case where the setting suggestion effect has not been performed. As illustrated in FIG. 12C, when the arrow image 250F002 hits “x” of the target image 250F004, “x” which is the failure image 250F005 indicating that the setting suggestion effect has failed is displayed on the screen. Displayed in the center. In contrast, FIG. 12D is a diagram illustrating a case where the setting suggestion effect has been performed. As illustrated in FIG. 12D, when the arrow image 250F002 hits the “O” of the target image 250F004, the setting suggestion effect has been successful, for example, a character D image 250F006 is displayed from a plurality of characters. You.

  As shown in FIG. 12-11 (E) when a big hit is made within the 21st to 100th rotations, an effect indicating that a big hit has been made at the time of the big hit is executed on the image display device 5. In addition, a remaining number display 250F001 indicating the remaining number of changes is displayed at the upper right of the screen. The remaining number display decreases by one each time the variable display is executed once. FIG. 12E shows a case where a big hit occurs in the remaining 45 rotations at the 55th rotation after the start of ST.

  Next, during the jackpot round, a second setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 12-11 (F) is executed. In the second setting suggestion effect, a bowling effect in which the ball image 250F007 is thrown toward the six pin images 250F008 to defeat the pin image 250F008 is executed. When a big hit is made within ST21 to the 100th rotation, a boring effect that can throw the ball twice at any rotation speed is executed. “Two chances!” At the top of the pin image 250F008 is a character indicating that there is an effect in which the ball can be thrown twice. When the push button 31B is pressed while the button image 250F003 imitating the push button 31B displayed on the lower right of the screen is displayed, the ball image 250F007 rolls toward the pin image 250F008.

  FIG. 12G is a diagram illustrating a case where the setting suggestion effect has not been executed. As shown in FIG. 12G, when the ball image 250F007 does not hit the pin image 250F008, or when all the pin images 250F008 do not fall down in one throw, it indicates that the setting suggestion effect has failed. “×” which is the failure image 250F005 is displayed at the center of the screen. On the other hand, FIG. 12-11 (H) is a diagram illustrating a case where the setting suggestion effect has been executed. As shown in FIG. 12-11 (H), when the ball image 250F007 hits the pin image 250F008 and all the pin images 250F008 fall down, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect has succeeded, and the character C image 250F009 is obtained from a plurality of characters. Is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 12-11, when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotation from the start of ST, and when the jackpot is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotation from the start of ST, the production mode of the setting suggestion effect is different. In this way, the staging mode of the setting suggestion effect differs between when the game is controlled to the big hit game state at the 1st to 20th rotations in the ST state and when it is controlled to the big hit game state at the 21st to 100th rotations. Therefore, attention can be paid to the execution timing of the effect indicating the setting, and the interest of the game is improved.

  FIG. 12-12 is a diagram illustrating a setting suggestion effect determination table. FIG. 12A shows a setting suggestion effect determination table for ST1 to 20 rotations, and FIG. 12B shows a setting suggestion effect determination table for ST21 to 100 rotations. These tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The setting suggestion effect determination table for ST1 to 20 rotations in FIG. 12-12 (A) indicates whether or not a setting suggestion effect is to be executed in the setting suggestion effect process when a big hit occurs within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST. This table is used to determine which setting suggestion effect (character A, character B, character C or character D) to execute. In the setting 1, the ratio determined without the effect is 82%, the ratio determined by the character A is 7%, the ratio determined by the character B is 6%, the ratio determined by the character C is 5%, and the character D is determined. Is not determined (0%). In the setting 2, the ratio determined without the effect is 82%, the ratio determined by the character A is 5%, the ratio determined by the character B is 7%, the ratio determined by the character C is 6%, and the character D is determined. Is not determined (0%). In the setting 3, the ratio determined without the effect is 77%, the ratio determined by the character A is 5%, the ratio determined by the character B is 6%, the ratio determined by the character C is 7%, and the character D is determined. Is 5%.

  The setting suggestion effect determination table for ST21 to 100 rotations in FIG. 12-12 (B) includes, in the setting suggestion effect process, whether or not a setting suggestion effect is executed when a big hit occurs within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. This table is used to determine which setting suggestion effect (character A, character B, character C or character D) to execute. In the setting 1, the ratio determined without the effect is 88%, the ratio determined by the character A is 5%, the ratio determined by the character B is 4%, the ratio determined by the character C is 3%, and the character D is determined. Is not determined (0%). In the setting 2, the ratio determined without the effect is 88%, the ratio determined by the character A is 3%, the ratio determined by the character B is 5%, the ratio determined by the character C is 4%, and the character D is determined. Is not determined (0%). In the setting 3, the ratio determined without the effect is 86%, the ratio determined by the character A is 3%, the ratio determined by the character B is 4%, the ratio determined by the character C is 5%, and the character D is determined. Is 2%.

  By setting the data shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, in the setting suggestion effect process, if a big hit occurs within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST, regardless of the number of rotations from the start of ST. , No effect is selected at a high rate, and setting suggestion effects are difficult to execute. When the effect is executed, the ratio selected as the effect to be executed is “character A> character B> character C” in the case of setting 1, and “character B> character” in the case of setting 2. C> Character A ”, and in the case of setting 3,“ Character C> Character B> Character A ”.

  With such a setting, the character corresponding to the set value in both cases within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST and within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST is character A in setting 1, and character B in setting 2. In setting 3, the appearance rate of the character C is high. However, the appearance ratio is higher in the case within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST than in the case within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. Therefore, it can be said that the reliability of the set value for the character is higher in the case of 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST than in the case of 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. Also, if the character D appears regardless of the number of changes, it is determined that the setting 3 is set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12-12, when the big hit is controlled at the first to twentieth rotation from the start of ST, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is larger than when the big hit is controlled at the 21 to 100th rotation from the start of ST. Is high. With this configuration, the big hit is controlled at the first to twentieth rotations from the start of the ST, so that the big hit game state is continued, so that the interest is improved and the execution of the setting suggestion effect can be noticed.

  In addition, since the 21st to 100th rotation from the start of ST is the number of times after the 1st to 20th rotation, the big hit game is performed at the 1st to 20th rotation earlier than the 21st to 100th rotation when controlled to the ST state. Even if the state is controlled, it is possible to prevent the user from thinking that a loss has occurred (for example, the effect of watching only during ST cannot be sufficiently viewed).

  The period up to the 20th rotation after the start of ST is set as a period including the 1st to 20th rotations but not including the 21st to 100th rotations. With this configuration, it is possible to make the user pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the state is controlled to the big hit game state within the predetermined period. In addition, during the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of ST, an effect indicating that the rate at which the setting suggestion effect is executed when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state is a higher period than after the 21st rotation is performed. What should I do? For example, in the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of ST, the background may be changed, or a telop indicating a special period may be displayed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 12-12, when the jackpot is controlled at the first to twentieth rotation from the start of ST, a setting with higher reliability than when the big hit is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotation from the start of ST. A suggestion effect is performed. The high reliability of the setting suggestion effect means that it becomes easy for the player to guess which setting value the setting difference becomes more remarkable. By doing so, it is possible to focus on the setting suggestion effect when the big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations in the ST state, and the interest of the game is improved.

  FIG. 12-13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting suggestion effect process. The setting suggestion effect process is a process executed in the big hit effect process (S176).

  First, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a big hit has occurred within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST (250FS001). The effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a big hit has occurred within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST by confirming the number of times stored in the variation number counter for counting the number of variable displays during ST. judge. If the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is a big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST (Y in 250FS001), the effect of the setting suggestion effect is determined by the setting suggestion effect determination table for ST1 to 20 rotations. It is determined (250FS002), and the process proceeds to 250FS003. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is no big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST (N in 250FS001), the process proceeds to 250FS005.

  In 250FS003, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect. If it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed (Y in 250FS003), effect control CPU 120 sets the dart effect to be performed four times as the setting suggestion effect (250FS004), and ends the process. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the setting suggestion effect (N in 250FS003), the process ends.

  In 250FS005, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a big hit has occurred within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. The effect control CPU 120 confirms the number of times stored in the variation number counter for counting the number of variable displays during ST to determine whether or not a big hit has occurred within 21 to 100 revolutions from the start of ST. judge. If the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is a big hit within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST (Y in 250FS005), the effect of the setting suggestion effect is determined by the setting suggestion effect determination table for ST21 to 100 rotations. It is determined (250FS006), and the process proceeds to 250FS007. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is not a big hit within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST (N in 250FS005), the process ends.

  In 250FS007, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect. If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed (Y in 250FS007), it is set to perform the bowling effect twice as the setting suggestion effect (250FS008), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the setting suggestion effect (N in 250FS007), the process ends.

  Note that the setting suggestion effect may be always executed when a big hit occurs during ST. Even in such a case, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate in a big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST than in a big hit within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. It is desirable to do so. Further, the appearance rate of only the character with the highest appearance rate corresponding to the set value may be changed depending on the number of rotations from the start of ST.

(About the modification of the characteristic part)
As above, the characteristic portions 248F to 250F have been described with reference to the drawings. Included in the invention. Hereinafter, modified examples of the characteristic portions 248F to 250F will be described.

  The continuation rate suggestion effect of FIG. 12-2 (A) may be executed at the start of the ST state at the start of the special state and at the end of the ST state at the end of the special state. Specifically, the continuation rate suggestion effect may be executed at least at one of the start of the ST period (ST rotation 1) and the end of the ST period (ST 100 rotation). In such a case, a variation pattern that is not selected in the second to 99th rotations may be selected as the variation pattern. In particular, at the 100th rotation, a long fluctuation pattern is selected to display the acquired payout, so that the continuation rate suggestion effect may be executed during the payout display period. . Further, as the continuation rate suggesting effect, the effect indicated by the color of the effect around the screen of the image display device 5, the effect indicated by the character form, the effect indicated by the display contents of the character, and the effect indicated by the character form (For example, the color of a light guide plate that reflects light incident from the side and emits the light to the front side) may be executed.

  Also, when the continuation rate suggestion effect is executed, the effect is not automatically executed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 side, but is executed by the player operating the operating means at a different timing or a different method than usual. It may be. Specifically, the continuation rate suggestion effect may be executed in response to execution of the back button operation by long pressing of the button or input of a command such as a cross key.

  An effect control command for designating a display result is transmitted by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 side. Then, the above-described pending continuous production may be performed based on the reception of the command. In such a case, if the production control command for designating the display result is not normal due to some influence, the production control CPU 120 restricts the execution of the held continuous production in the same production form as the continuation rate suggestion production. do it. In this way, it is possible to prevent erroneous information from being suggested to the player. In addition, the effect to be restricted may be determined in advance, such as not to execute only the effect in which the character D whose high setting is confirmed appears.

  The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 transmits information on the set value as shown in step 112IWS031 in FIG. 11-9 and step 112IWS108 in FIG. 11-13. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes a continuation rate suggestion effect based on the information regarding the set value, as shown in FIG. 12-4. In such a case, if the set value command is not normal as the information on the set value, the effect control CPU 120 may limit the execution of the continuation rate suggestion effect of high continuation determination. In this way, it is possible to prevent a wrong set value from being suggested to the player without reducing the number of executions of the continuation rate suggestion effect. Instead of limiting, a continuation rate suggesting effect indicating low continuation may be executed.

  The continuation rate suggestion effect and the hold continuous effect are not effects that simply cause a character to appear, but are effects in which a continuation rate or the like is indicated as a result of performing any of the effects such as the above-described roulette effect or bowling effect. Is also good.

  Regarding the continuation rate suggestion effect, the case where the continuation rate suggestion effect is executed when the hit is not a big hit from the normal state has been described. However, the continuation rate suggestion effect may be executed even in the case of a big hit from the normal state. In such a case, the holding continuous production may be executed simultaneously, or the execution of the holding continuous production may be restricted (for example, the holding continuous production is not executed at the first hit).

  The continuation rate suggestion effect may be such that the reliability is increased by continuously entering the ST state. In this way, the interest of the game when the ST state continues is improved. Conversely, when the ST state ends immediately (for example, when the ST ends one time), the continuation rate suggestion effect is executed at the end of the ST. What is necessary is just to be performed. In this way, even if the ST state ends at an early stage, the set value is suggested, so that when the possibility of the high setting is suggested, it is possible to urge the player to continue the game. Enhancement is enhanced.

  As shown in FIG. 12-9, the setting suggestion effect has a larger execution ratio when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST than when the jackpot is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the ST start. Was higher. However, when the big hit is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of ST, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be higher than when the big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotation from the start of ST. Specifically, at the number of times immediately before the end of ST, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be higher than at the number of times immediately after the start of ST. By doing so, it is possible to give attention to the execution of the setting suggestion effect while giving a sense of security when controlled to the big hit gaming state at a number of times slower than the number of times after the start of ST when controlled to the ST state. .

  The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 transmits information on the set value as shown in step 112IWS031 in FIG. 11-9 and step 112IWS108 in FIG. 11-13. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect process of FIG. 12-9 based on the information regarding the set value. In such a case, if the setting value command is not normal as the information on the setting value, the effect control CPU 120 may execute a setting suggestion effect of a low setting. In this way, it is possible to prevent a wrong setting value from being suggested to the player without reducing the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect. In addition, without making a tentative decision (temporary setting) to execute the setting suggestion effect of the low setting, not executing only the pattern of the high setting finalization, and executing the setting suggestion effect selected by lottery from among them. May be performed. The setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 12-7, in the invention related to the characteristic portion 249F, the case where the effect using the operation means for the remaining number of times until the 20th rotation is executed has been described. However, the effect using the operation means may not be executed. Also, instead of performing the lottery every remaining number of times, the lottery may be executed as one setting suggestive effect for a plurality of times.

  As shown in FIG. 12-12, the setting suggestion effect has a larger execution ratio when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST than when the jackpot is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the ST start. Was higher. However, when the big hit is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of ST, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be higher than when the big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotation from the start of ST. Specifically, at the number of times immediately before the end of ST, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be higher than at the number of times immediately after the start of ST. By doing so, it is possible to give attention to the execution of the setting suggestion effect while giving a sense of security when controlled to the big hit gaming state at a number of times slower than the number of times after the start of ST when controlled to the ST state. .

  The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 transmits information on the set value as shown in step 112IWS031 in FIG. 11-9 and step 112IWS108 in FIG. 11-13. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect process of FIGS. 12-13 based on the information regarding the set value. In such a case, if the setting value command is not normal as the information on the setting value, the effect control CPU 120 may execute a setting suggestion effect of a low setting. In this way, it is possible to prevent a wrong setting value from being suggested to the player without reducing the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect. In addition, without making a tentative decision (temporary setting) to execute the setting suggestion effect of the low setting, not executing only the pattern of the high setting finalization, and executing the setting suggestion effect selected by lottery from among them. May be performed. The setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

  In the continuation rate suggestion effect of FIG. 12-3, the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 12-8, and the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 12-12, the presence / absence of the effect and the character at the time of the effect are determined at the same time. However, a table for determining the presence or absence of the effect and a table for determining the character when the effect is executed may be provided separately.

  The continuation rate suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect may be executed not only in the case of controlling the big hit but also in the case of a loss. Further, in such a case, various effects may be executed by ending the ST period without executing the big hit or by continuing such a state a plurality of times.

  The round in which the setting suggestion effect pattern A or the setting suggestion effect pattern B is executed may be determined in advance. Further, a round to be executed may be determined by random lottery. Further, these effects may be executed during the ending period. Further, the execution timing may be different depending on the remaining number of times of ST.

  Note that the controls in the above features may be applied in combination with each other. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the effect regarding the setting suggestion.

(Description of the invention relating to the characteristic portion 248F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 248F includes the following invention relating to the above-described characteristic portion 248F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of set values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on the set value. Was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, any one of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion is displayed during the variable display of the identification information according to the set value before and after the change of the set value, and the set value is suggested. There was a gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). In addition, there has been a gaming machine in which a high probability state is maintained until a specific number of times of variably displaying identification information is executed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044).

  However, when performing an effect indicating setting as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 on a gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044, there is room for improvement in the effect indicating the setting. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic portion 248F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player; ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, an ST state) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, an ST state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases until a predetermined number of (for example, 100) variable displays are executed. For example, the CPU 103)
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state is different depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12A, the ST continuation rate is different),
In the special state, it is possible to execute a continuation rate suggestion effect that suggests to the player the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. is there).

  According to such a configuration, the continuation rate suggestion effect that suggests the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state to the player is executed, so that the effect suggesting the setting can be noticed, and the interest of the game is increased. improves.

In addition, as a gaming machine according to the feature portion 248F that solves the problem of executing an effect that suggests a setting as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 on a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044,
(A) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player; ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, an ST state) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, an ST state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases until a predetermined number of (for example, 100) variable displays are executed. For example, the CPU 103)
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state is different depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12A, the ST continuation rate is different),
In the special state, it is possible to execute a continuation rate suggestion effect that suggests the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state to the player (for example, as shown in FIG. is there),
further,
At least a first numerical value display area (for example, an interface area 18SG005I including a normal timer or an ART remaining game number display area in the modified example 156SG-1) and a second numerical display area (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer) And display means (for example, the image display device 5) having the remaining game number display area of the additional zone in the modified example 156SG-1.
A predetermined effect that updates a numerical value in at least one of the first numerical value display region and the second numerical value display region to a specific value (for example, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect, or an additional game in the modification 156SG-1) The number is added to the number of remaining games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone), and a special effect (for example, shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A)) for suggesting the predetermined effect. As described above, the effect execution means (for example, a part that notifies the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect with the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B) (for example, Effect control CPU 120);
With
The effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect on the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area as the special effect (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in FIGS. -22 (A), 10-23 (A), and 10-24 (A), the normal timer effect period, the special timer effect period, the normal timer effect period, and the special timer effect period As shown in a portion in which the sum value is notified in the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, or the modified example 156-1, the number of additional games is determined by the remaining game number of ART and the additional zone. A game machine characterized in that it is added to both of the number of remaining games).
According to this feature, the continuation rate suggestion effect that suggests the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state to the player is executed, so that the effect suggesting the setting can be noticed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In addition, as a special effect, an effect can be executed with the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area as suggestion targets, so that the entertainment of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1),
The continuation rate suggestion effect is an effect executed at the end of the advantageous state (for example, the continuation rate suggestion effect is executed during an ending period).

  According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the end of the advantageous state, and the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
There are a plurality of rendering modes of the continuation rate suggestion rendering, including rendering modes that can be executed with any setting value (for example, as shown in FIG. Even if it can be executed).

  According to such a configuration, the set value can be suitably suggested, and the interest of the game is improved.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above,
The plurality of types of the continuation rate suggesting effects include an effect mode in which it is determined that the high continuation ratio is set to be high for the player (for example, as shown in FIG. A character D that is determined to be set in the setting 3 is included).

  According to such a configuration, the set value can be suitably suggested, and the interest of the game is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4),
Holding storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing information related to variable display as holding storage information;
Determining means (for example, S110 in FIG. 5) for determining whether or not to be in the advantageous state based on the hold storage information;
Determining means (for example, S101 in FIG. 5) for determining whether or not to be in the advantageous state before the determination means determines;
In the advantageous state, when the hold storage information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means based on the determination result of the determination means, the state is controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, the production control CPU 120 executes the reservation continuous production shown in FIG. 12-6).
The hold continuous production execution means can execute the hold continuous production in the same production mode as the continuation rate suggestion production (for example, as shown in FIG. Character appears).

  According to such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved by combining the continuation rate suggesting effect and the holding continuous effect.

(6) In the gaming machine of (5),
A determination information output unit (for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting determination information (for example, an effect control command for specifying a display result) regarding the determination result of the determination unit;
The holding continuous production execution means,
Executing the hold continuous effect based on the determination information output from the determination information output means (for example, executing a hold continuous effect based on an effect control command specifying a display result);
If the determination information output from the determination information output means is not normal, at least the execution of the held continuous production in the same production mode as the continuation rate suggestion production is limited (for example, production control for designating a display result) If the command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 restricts the execution of the held continuous effect in the same effect form as the continuation rate suggestion effect).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent suggesting wrong information to the player.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6),
Further comprising operating means (for example, a push button 31B) operable by the player,
The continuation rate suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the operation unit (for example, the continuation rate suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B).

  According to such a configuration, the player's willingness to operate can be improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (7),
A set value information output unit capable of outputting set value information capable of specifying which set value is set (for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, the step 112IWS031 in FIG. 11-9, the step S112 in FIG. 11-13) Step 112 IWS 108)
Based on the set value information output from the set value information output means, a continuation rate suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the continuation rate suggestion effect (for example, effect control CPU 120, continuation rate suggestion effect of FIG. 12-4) ) And
If the set value information output from the set value information output means is not normal, the continuation rate suggestion effect execution means determines that the predetermined continuation rate is set to a high degree of advantage at least for the player. (For example, if the set value command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 restricts the execution of the continuation rate suggestion effect of determining a high setting).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a wrong set value from being suggested to the player without reducing the number of executions of the continuation rate suggestion effect.
Note that the correspondence between (2) to (8) and (1) in the feature portion 248F described above can be applied to the correspondence between (2) to (8) and (A).

(Description of the invention relating to the characteristic portion 249F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 249F includes the following invention relating to the above-described characteristic portion 249F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of set values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on the set value. Was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, any one of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion is displayed during the variable display of the identification information according to the set value before and after the change of the set value, and the set value is suggested. There was a gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). In addition, there has been a gaming machine in which a high probability state is maintained until a specific number of times of variably displaying identification information is executed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044).

  However, when an effect that suggests setting as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 is executed on a gaming machine such as that disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044, there is room for improvement in the timing of executing the effect that suggests the setting. Was. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic portion 249F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player; ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, an ST state) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, an ST state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases until a predetermined number of (for example, 100) variable displays are executed. For example, the CPU 103)
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state is different depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12A, the ST continuation rate is different),
In the special state, when the state is controlled to the advantageous state at the first time and when the state is controlled to the advantageous state at the second time different from the first time, the state is controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-9, when a big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, and 21 to 21 times from the start of ST, as shown in FIG. 12-9). The execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect differs between when the big hit is controlled at the 100th rotation (the setting suggestion effect is not executed at the 21st to 100th times).

  According to such a configuration, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different between when the special state is controlled to the advantageous state at the first time and when the second state is controlled to the advantageous state, Attention can be given to the execution timing of the effect suggesting the setting, and the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, as a gaming machine according to the feature portion 249F that solves the problem of executing an effect suggesting a setting as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 on a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044,
(A) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player; ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, an ST state) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, an ST state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases until a predetermined number of (for example, 100) variable displays are executed. For example, the CPU 103)
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state is different depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12A, the ST continuation rate is different),
In the special state, when the state is controlled to the advantageous state at the first time and when the state is controlled to the advantageous state at the second time different from the first time, the state is controlled to the advantageous state. The execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect that suggests to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-9, when the big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotation from the start of ST, and when 21 to 21 rotation from the start of ST). The execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect differs between when the big hit is controlled at the 100th rotation (the setting suggestion effect is not executed at the 21st to 100th times).
further,
At least a first numerical value display area (for example, an interface area 18SG005I including a normal timer or an ART remaining game number display area in the modified example 156SG-1) and a second numerical display area (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer) And display means (for example, the image display device 5) having the remaining game number display area of the additional zone in the modified example 156SG-1.
A predetermined effect that updates a numerical value in at least one of the first numerical value display region and the second numerical value display region to a specific value (for example, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect, or an additional game in the modification 156SG-1) The number is added to the number of remaining games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone), and a special effect (for example, shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A)) for suggesting the predetermined effect. As described above, the effect execution means (for example, a part that notifies the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect with the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B) (for example, Effect control CPU 120);
With
The effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect on the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area as the special effect (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in FIGS. -22 (A), 10-23 (A), and 10-24 (A), the normal timer effect period, the special timer effect period, the normal timer effect period, and the special timer effect period As shown in a portion in which the sum value is notified in the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, or the modified example 156-1, the number of additional games is determined by the remaining game number of ART and the additional zone. A game machine characterized in that it is added to both of the number of remaining games).
According to this feature, since the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different between when the special state is controlled to the advantageous state at the first time and when it is controlled to the advantageous state at the second time, the setting is changed. Attention can be given to the timing of execution of the suggested effect, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, interest in the case where the total game value reaches a predetermined size can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1),
The advantageous state is a state configured by repeating a predetermined game a plurality of times (for example, a state of repeating a round game),
The setting suggestion effect is an effect executed during the predetermined game (for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed during a round).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the predetermined game, and the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
When controlled to the advantageous state at the first time, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when controlled to the advantageous state at the second time (for example, in FIG. 12-9). As shown, when the big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotation from the start of ST, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the big hit is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotation from the start of the ST (the 211st to 100th rotations). Then, the setting suggestion effect is not executed))).

  According to such a configuration, by controlling to the advantageous state at the first time, interest is improved by the continuous advantageous state, and attention can be paid to the execution of the setting suggestion effect.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3),
The second number is a number after the first number (for example, the 21st to 100th rotation is a number after the 1st to 20th rotation).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a loss from being considered even if the state is controlled to the advantageous state at a time earlier than the second time when the state is controlled to the special state.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3),
The first number is a number after the second number (for example, the first number is a number near the end of ST, and the second number is a number immediately after the start of ST).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to give attention to the execution of the setting suggestion effect while giving a sense of security when controlled to the advantageous state at a number of times lower than the second number when controlled to the special state. .

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (5),
In the special state, a predetermined period including the first number but not including the second number is provided (for example, the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of ST is the first number). (Including a certain 1st to 20th rotation, but not including 21 to 100th rotation).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is to be executed when the state is controlled to the advantageous state within the predetermined period.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6),
A set value information output unit capable of outputting set value information capable of specifying which set value is set (for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, the step 112IWS031 in FIG. 11-9, the step S112 in FIG. 11-13) Step 112 IWS 108)
A setting suggestion effect execution unit capable of executing the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value information output from the setting value information output unit (for example, the effect control CPU 120, a setting suggestion effect process of FIG. 12-9); Further comprising
When the setting value information output from the setting value information output unit is not normal, the setting suggestion effect execution unit sets a predetermined setting value having a low degree of advantage to the player among the plurality of setting values. As described above, the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, when the setting value command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 executes a low setting suggestion effect).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an incorrect setting value from being suggested to the player without reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed.

(8) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player; ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, an ST state) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, an ST state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases until a predetermined number of (for example, 100) variable displays are executed. For example, the CPU 103)
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state is different depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12A, the ST continuation rate is different),
In the special state, when the state is controlled to the advantageous state at the first time, the state is controlled to the advantageous state than when the state is controlled to the advantageous state at the second time different from the first time. The reliability of the setting suggestion effect that suggests to the player is high (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-8, when the big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotation from the start of ST, 21 to 21 Since the setting suggestion effect with higher reliability is executed as compared with the case where the big hit is controlled at the 100th rotation (the setting suggestion effect is not executed at the 21st to 100th times, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is higher).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the setting suggestion effect when the control is controlled to the advantageous state at the first time in the special state, and the interest of the game is improved.
Note that the correspondence between (2) to (8) and (1) in the feature portion 249F described above can be applied to the correspondence between (2) to (8) and (A).

(Description of the invention relating to the characteristic portion 250F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 250F includes the following invention relating to the above-described characteristic portion 250F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of set values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on the set value. Was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, any one of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion is displayed during the variable display of the identification information according to the set value before and after the change of the set value, and the set value is suggested. There was a gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). In addition, there has been a gaming machine in which a high probability state is maintained until a specific number of times of variably displaying identification information is executed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044).

  However, when an effect that suggests setting as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 is executed on a gaming machine such as that disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044, there is room for improvement in the timing of executing the effect that suggests the setting. Was. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic portion 250F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player; ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, an ST state) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, an ST state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases until a predetermined number of (for example, 100) variable displays are executed. For example, the CPU 103)
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state is different depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12A, the ST continuation rate is different),
In the special state, when the state is controlled to the advantageous state at the first time and when the state is controlled to the advantageous state at the second time different from the first time, the state is controlled to the advantageous state. The production mode of the setting suggestion effect that suggests to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-11, when a big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotation from the start of ST, and when 21 to 21 rotation from the start of ST). The effect of the setting suggestion effect differs between when the big hit is controlled at the 100th rotation).

  According to such a configuration, the production mode of the setting suggestion effect differs between when the special state is controlled to the advantageous state at the first time and when it is controlled to the advantageous state at the second time, Attention can be given to the execution timing of the effect suggesting the setting, and the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, as a gaming machine according to the characteristic portion 250F that solves the problem of executing an effect suggesting a setting as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 on a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044,
(A) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player; ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, an ST state) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, an ST state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases until a predetermined number of (for example, 100) variable displays are executed. For example, the CPU 103)
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state is different depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12A, the ST continuation rate is different),
In the special state, when the state is controlled to the advantageous state at the first time and when the state is controlled to the advantageous state at the second time different from the first time, the state is controlled to the advantageous state. The effect of the setting suggestion effect that suggests to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-11, when a big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotation from the start of ST, and 21 to 21 rotation from the start of ST). The effect of the setting suggestion effect differs between when the big hit is controlled at the 100th rotation)
further,
At least a first numerical value display area (for example, an interface area 18SG005I including a normal timer or an ART remaining game number display area in the modified example 156SG-1) and a second numerical display area (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer) And display means (for example, the image display device 5) having the remaining game number display area of the additional zone in the modified example 156SG-1.
A predetermined effect that updates a numerical value in at least one of the first numerical value display region and the second numerical value display region to a specific value (for example, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect, or an additional game in the modification 156SG-1) The number is added to the number of remaining games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone), and a special effect (for example, shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A)) for suggesting the predetermined effect. As described above, the effect execution means (for example, a part that notifies the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect with the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B) (for example, Effect control CPU 120);
With
The effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect on the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area as the special effect (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in FIGS. -22 (A), 10-23 (A), and 10-24 (A), the normal timer effect period, the special timer effect period, the normal timer effect period, and the special timer effect period As shown in a portion in which the sum value is notified in the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, or the modified example 156-1, the number of additional games is determined by the remaining game number of ART and the additional zone. A game machine characterized in that it is added to both of the number of remaining games).
According to this feature, the effect of the setting suggestion effect is different between when the advantageous state is controlled at the first time in the special state and when the advantageous state is controlled at the second time in the special state. Attention can be given to the timing of execution of the suggested effect, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, interest in the case where the total game value reaches a predetermined size can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1),
The advantageous state is a state configured by repeating a predetermined game a plurality of times (for example, a state of repeating a round game),
The setting suggestion effect is an effect executed during the predetermined game (for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed during a round).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the predetermined game, and the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
When controlled to the advantageous state at the first time, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when controlled to the advantageous state at the second time (for example, in FIG. 12-12). As shown, when the jackpot is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotation from the start of ST, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the jackpot is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotation from the start of ST).

  According to such a configuration, by controlling to the advantageous state at the first time, interest is improved by the continuous advantageous state, and attention can be paid to the execution of the setting suggestion effect.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3),
The second number is a number after the first number (for example, the 21st to 100th rotation is a number after the 1st to 20th rotation).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a loss from being considered even if the state is controlled to the advantageous state at a time earlier than the second time when the state is controlled to the special state.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3),
The first number is a number after the second number (for example, the first number is a number near the end of ST, and the second number is a number immediately after the start of ST).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to give attention to the execution of the setting suggestion effect while giving a sense of security when controlled to the advantageous state at a number of times lower than the second number when controlled to the special state. .

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (5),
In the special state, a predetermined period including the first number but not including the second number is provided (for example, the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of ST is the first number). (Including a certain 1st to 20th rotation, but not including 21 to 100th rotation).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is to be executed when the state is controlled to the advantageous state within the predetermined period.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6),
A set value information output unit capable of outputting set value information capable of specifying which set value is set (for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, the step 112IWS031 in FIG. 11-9, the step S112 in FIG. 11-13) Step 112 IWS 108)
A setting suggestion effect execution unit capable of executing the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value information output from the setting value information output unit (for example, the effect control CPU 120, a setting suggestion effect process of FIGS. 12 to 13); Further comprising
When the setting value information output from the setting value information output unit is not normal, the setting suggestion effect execution unit sets a predetermined setting value having a low degree of advantage to the player among the plurality of setting values. As described above, the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, when the setting value command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 executes a low setting suggestion effect).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an incorrect setting value from being suggested to the player without reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed.

(8) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player; ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, an ST state) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, an ST state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases until a predetermined number of (for example, 100) variable displays are executed. For example, the CPU 103)
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state is different depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12A, the ST continuation rate is different),
In the special state, when the state is controlled to the advantageous state at the first time, the state is controlled to the advantageous state than when the state is controlled to the advantageous state at the second time different from the first time. The reliability of the setting suggestion effect that suggests to the player is high (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-12, when a big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotation from the start of ST, 21 to 21 Since the setting suggestion effect having a higher reliability is executed as compared with the case where the big hit is controlled at the 100th rotation, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is higher.)

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the setting suggestion effect when the control is controlled to the advantageous state at the first time in the special state, and the interest of the game is improved.
Note that the correspondence between (2) to (8) and (1) in the above-described characteristic portion 250F can be applied to the correspondence between (2) to (8) and (A).

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 109AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 109AK of this embodiment will be described. In the front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a first reservation display 25A, a second reservation display 25B, a normal symbol display 20, Although a plurality of types of display devices (displays) such as the general-purpose display 25C are provided at separate locations, these display devices may be provided collectively. For example, an information display device 109AK001 as shown in FIG. 13A is used as an information display means for displaying a plurality of game-related information relating to a game (a display result of a symbol, the number of reserved storages, etc.). The device (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first reserve display device 25A, the second reserve display device 25B, the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the general graphic reserve display device 25C) may be provided instead. It may be. The information display device 109AK001 only needs to be provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position where the player can visually recognize it from the front, a lower left corner, a lower right corner, or the like in the game area).

  As shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, the information display device 109AK001 includes a plurality of display portions configured by lamps such as LEDs, and displays game-related information based on the lighting / extinguishing status of each display portion. I do. Each display portion of the information display device 109AK001 includes a first special symbol display device 109AK4A, a second special symbol display device 109AK4B, a first reservation indicator 109AK25A, a second reservation indicator 109AK25B, a normal symbol indicator 109AK20, and a general symbol. It is a hold indicator 109AK25C. In addition, the information display device 109AK001 shows a round number display 109AK011 indicating the total number of rounds in the big hit gaming state in the big hit gaming state, a time saving state display 109AK012 indicating the time saving state, and a probable change state. There is provided a display portion serving as the probability change state indicator 109AK013. Thus, the information display device 109AK001 is one module for displaying a plurality of types of game-related information. Each display portion of the information display device 109AK001 is configured by, for example, the same LED. By doing so, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Each of the first special symbol display device 109AK4A and the second special symbol display device 109AK4B is composed of eight display portions (LEDs), and a display result (hit) is determined by a combination (lighting pattern) of turning on and off the eight display portions. Type) is displayed. Which lighting pattern is assigned to the loss or the hit type may be arbitrarily determined.

  Each of the first hold indicator 109AK25A and the second hold indicator 109AK25B is composed of four display parts (LEDs), and displays the first hold number and the second hold number based on the number of lights.

  The normal symbol display 109AK20 is composed of four display portions (LEDs), and displays a display result (type of hit) by a lighting pattern of the four display portions. Which lighting pattern is assigned to the loss or the hit type may be arbitrarily determined.

  The general-purpose reservation display 109AK25C is configured by four display portions (LEDs), and displays the number of general-purpose reservation storages based on the number of lights.

  The number-of-rounds display 109AK011 is composed of six display portions (LEDs), and displays the total number of rounds in the big hit game state in the big hit game state by a lighting pattern of the six display portions. Which lighting pattern is assigned to which round number is arbitrary.

  The time saving state indicator 109AK012 is constituted by one display part (LED), and displays that it is in a time saving state by being lit. The probable change state indicator 109AK013 is configured by one display portion (LED), and lights up to indicate that it is in the probable change state.

  The shape of the information display device 109AK001 and the number, shape, and arrangement of display portions may be arbitrary as long as various game-related information can be displayed. For example, the display portion of the information display device 109AK001 may be configured by 7-segment LEDs. Further, information other than the above-described game-related information may be displayed on the information display device 109AK001, or some of the game-related information may not be displayed.

  In this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, a RAM clearing process in which the range of clearing (initializing) the RAM 102 is different according to the state (operation) at the time of starting is executed. As illustrated in FIG. 13B, when an initialization operation is performed (the clear switch is turned on, the setting key 112IW051 is turned off and the power is turned on) at the time of startup, all the stored contents of the RAM 102 are cleared. If a power failure recovery operation (clear switch and setting key 112IW051 is turned off and the power is turned on) is performed at the time of startup, all the contents stored in the RAM 102 are retained. When a setting change operation (clear switch and setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the power is turned on) is performed at the time of startup, information relating to a special figure display result and a general figure display result in the contents stored in the RAM 102 is retained, and other information is cleared. Is done. A state in which a setting change operation is performed at the time of startup and a set value can be changed is also referred to as a change permission state. In addition, if a setting change operation is performed at the time of startup, information about the display result is retained, but information about the game state and hold storage information are cleared, so that there is an initialization operation and a case where the setting change operation is performed There is no difference in the degree of advantage for the player except for the set value. Thereby, a fair game can be provided. FIG. 13B shows a part of the information stored in the RAM 102. However, other information (various flags, determination results, and the like) are all information when the initialization operation is performed at the time of startup. Is cleared, and when the power failure recovery operation is performed at the time of startup, all information is retained. When a setting change operation is performed at the time of activation, other information may be cleared or arbitrary information may be held.

  13-3 to 13-6 are display operation examples of the information display device 109AK001 when the power is turned off during the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and then turned on.

  In FIG. 13-3 (A), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being activated (power is on), the lost symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 109AK4A, and the first number of retained memories is displayed on the first reservation indicator 109AK25A. It is displayed that there are three. In addition, the ordinary figure loss symbol is displayed on the ordinary symbol display 109AK20, and the fact that the ordinary figure storage number is 1 is displayed on the ordinary figure holding display 109AK25C. When the time saving state indicator 109AK012 is turned on, it is displayed that the gaming state is the time saving state. Here, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, as shown in FIG. 13-3 (B), all display portions of the information display device 109AK001 are turned off. Thereafter, when a power failure recovery operation is performed when the power is turned on, all the stored contents of the RAM 102 are retained, and control for displaying game-related information is executed again based on the stored contents. Then, as shown in FIG. 13C, the information display device 109AK001 is restored to the display state before the power is turned off.

  In FIG. 13-4 (A), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being activated, a lost symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 109AK4A, and a normal symbol lost symbol is displayed on the ordinary symbol display 109AK20. Here, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, as shown in FIG. 13-4 (B), all display portions of the information display device 109AK001 are turned off. Thereafter, when a power failure recovery operation is performed when the power is turned on, all the stored contents of the RAM 102 are retained, and control for displaying game-related information is executed again based on the stored contents. Then, as shown in FIG. 13C, the information display device 109AK001 is restored to the display state before the power is turned off.

  In FIG. 13-5 (A), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being activated, the lost symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 109AK4A, and the first number of retained symbols is three on the first reserved indicator 109AK25A. It is displayed. In addition, the ordinary figure loss symbol is displayed on the ordinary symbol display 109AK20, and the fact that the ordinary figure storage number is 1 is displayed on the ordinary figure holding display 109AK25C. When the time saving state indicator 109AK012 is turned on, it is displayed that the gaming state is the time saving state. Here, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, as shown in FIG. 13-5 (B), all display portions of the information display device 109AK001 are turned off. Thereafter, when an initialization operation is performed when the power is turned on, all the stored contents of the RAM 102 are erased. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-5 (C), the information display device 109AK001 is completely turned off even after the power is turned on.

  In FIG. 13-6 (A), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being activated, a lost symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 109AK4A, and a normal symbol lost symbol is displayed on the ordinary symbol display 109AK20. Here, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, as shown in FIG. 13-6 (B), all display portions of the information display device 109AK001 are turned off. Thereafter, when the setting change operation is performed at the time of power-on, as shown in FIG. 13C, all the display parts of the information display device 109AK001 are turned on during the setting change (in the change permission state). . When the change permission state ends, the information related to the special figure display result and the ordinary figure display result among the storage contents of the RAM 102 is held, and the control for displaying the game-related information is executed again based on the storage contents. . Then, as shown in FIG. 13-6 (D), a lost symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 109AK4A, a general symbol lost symbol is displayed on the ordinary symbol indicator 109AK20, and a display before the power is turned off. It becomes the same as the state.

  As shown in FIG. 13B, in this embodiment, when a setting change operation is performed at the time of power-on (at startup), information on a special figure display result and a general figure display result is held. It has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13D, even if the setting is changed at the time of turning on the power, the display result is displayed on the first special symbol display device 109AK4A and the ordinary symbol display 109AK20 as before the power is turned off. can do. The display state of the information display device 109AK001 is the same as that when the power failure recovery operation is executed, as shown in FIG. Therefore, even when the player checks the information display device 109AK001 at the time of opening the hall or the like, it is difficult to grasp whether the power failure recovery operation or the setting change operation has been performed. In addition, since the presence or absence of a setting change cannot be grasped by the display state of the information display device 109AK001 at the time of activation, it is not necessary to initialize the remaining gaming machines when changing the settings of some gaming machines. Work of activating a plurality of gaming machines by a player can be simplified.

  In addition, it is preferable that the display of the image display device 5 at the time of activation is common (for example, a screen indicating that the image is activated) regardless of the operation at the time of activation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing which operation was performed at the time of startup by the display of the image display device 5. In order to enable confirmation by a hall employee or the like, the executed processing (initialization processing, restoration processing, setting change processing, etc.) may be displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of startup.

  If a setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), information other than the information relating to the special figure display result and the general figure display result is cleared, so that when the power is turned off, the first hold display 109AK25A, Even when the second hold indicator 109AK25B, the general-purpose hold indicator 109AK25C, the number-of-rounds indicator 109AK011, the time-saving status indicator 109AK012, and the probable change status indicator 109AK013 are turned on, the information on these displays is cleared at the time of the setting change operation. Therefore, after the setting change operation, these display parts are turned off.

(Modification of the characteristic part 109AK)
This feature is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. In addition, all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and some of them may be missing. In addition, this feature and other features may be appropriately combined. For example, at least a part of the configuration of the feature units 248F to 250F may be introduced into the present feature unit.

  In the above embodiment, when the initialization operation is performed at the time of turning on the power, the information display device 109AK001 is set to be completely turned off after the power is turned on. However, when the initialization operation is performed at the time of turning on the power, the first display is performed. The most frequently appearing symbol (for example, a lost symbol) may be displayed on the special symbol display device 109AK4A (or the second special symbol display device 109AK4B) and the ordinary symbol display device 109AK20. By doing in this way, even at the time of the initialization operation, the display of the information display device 109AK001 at the time of startup is the same as at the time of the power failure recovery operation or at the time of the setting change operation (for example, FIG. 13C and FIG. D)), and a substantially common display can be performed regardless of which operation is performed at the time of startup. As a result, even when the information display device 109AK001 is confirmed, it is more difficult to determine which operation has been performed.

  In the above-described embodiment, when a setting change operation is performed at the time of startup, information related to a special figure display result and a general figure display result among the contents stored in the RAM 102 is held, and other information is cleared. Alternatively, a part of other information may be held. Alternatively, all information may be cleared. In this case, when a setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on, the most frequently appearing symbol (for example, a lost symbol) is displayed on the first special symbol display device 109AK4A (or the second special symbol display device 109AK4B) and the ordinary symbol display device 109AK20. May be displayed. In this way, even when the same RAM clearing process as that performed during the initialization operation is performed during the setting change operation, the display of the information display device 109AK001 at startup is displayed in the same manner as during the power failure recovery operation or the setting change operation ( For example, the display shown in FIG. 13C or FIG. 13D can be obtained, and a substantially common display can be obtained regardless of which operation is performed at the time of startup.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic portion 109AK)
As a pachinko gaming machine capable of setting a set value, for example, a pachinko gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has been proposed. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, stored contents other than the set values are cleared when the setting change processing is performed.
In such a gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the handling of information held at the time of setting change.
The gaming machine according to the characteristic portion 109AK is made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that suitably retains information at the time of setting change and makes it difficult to determine whether there is a setting change. And
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 109AK is:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that performs a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3) among a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player )When,
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 executing steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling to a change permission state for permitting change of the set value by the setting means based on a setting change permission operation;
Information display means (for example, information display device 109AK001) for displaying a plurality of game-related information related to the game,
The information display means,
When the power failure restoration operation is performed, the control for displaying all the game related information displayed before the power failure restoration operation is executed again (for example, in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4),
When the change permission state is controlled based on the setting change permission operation, control for displaying a part of the game related information (of the information displayed before the change permission operation) after the change permission state ends. (For example, FIG. 13-6).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not there is a setting change.

Further, as a gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 109AK that solves the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902A,
(A) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that performs a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3) among a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player )When,
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 executing steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling to a change permission state for permitting change of the set value by the setting means based on a setting change permission operation;
Information display means (for example, information display device 109AK001) for displaying a plurality of game-related information related to the game,
The information display means,
When the power failure restoration operation is performed, the control for displaying all the game related information displayed before the power failure restoration operation is executed again (for example, in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4),
When the change permission state is controlled based on the setting change permission operation, control for displaying a part of the game related information (of the information displayed before the change permission operation) after the change permission state ends. (For example, FIG. 13-6),
further,
At least a first numerical value display area (for example, an interface area 18SG005I including a normal timer or an ART remaining game number display area in the modified example 156SG-1) and a second numerical display area (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer) And display means (for example, the image display device 5) having the remaining game number display area of the additional zone in the modified example 156SG-1.
A predetermined effect that updates a numerical value in at least one of the first numerical value display region and the second numerical value display region to a specific value (for example, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect, or an additional game in the modification 156SG-1) The number is added to the number of remaining games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone), and a special effect (for example, shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A)) for suggesting the predetermined effect. As described above, the effect execution means (for example, a part that notifies the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect with the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B) (for example, Effect control CPU 120);
With
The effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect on the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area as the special effect (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in FIGS. -22 (A), 10-23 (A), and 10-24 (A), the normal timer effect period, the special timer effect period, the normal timer effect period, and the special timer effect period As shown in a portion in which the sum value is notified in the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, or the modified example 156-1, the number of additional games is determined by the remaining game number of ART and the additional zone. A game machine characterized in that it is added to both of the number of remaining games).
According to this feature, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether there is a setting change. In addition, as a special effect, an effect can be executed with the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area as suggestion targets, so that the entertainment of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1),
Comprising variable display means for performing variable display,
The game-related information may include at least information on the number of variable displays suspended (for example, a first suspended storage number, a second suspended storage number).
According to such a configuration, important information regarding the game can be displayed.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
It is possible to execute an initialization process in which the initialization range of the storage area is different depending on whether the initialization operation is performed or the case where the setting is permitted to be changed based on the setting change permission operation (for example, FIG. 13-). 2) You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute an appropriate initialization process according to a situation.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
The game-related information displayed after the change permission state ends may include at least a display result of a special symbol and a normal symbol.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not there is a setting change.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4),
The degree of advantage of the gaming machine is the same between the case where the initialization operation is performed and the case where the setting change permission state is ended (the information regarding the gaming state is cleared as shown in FIG. 13B). You may.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate a difference in the degree of advantage for the player between the initialization operation and the setting change.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
Display control means for executing display control of display means based on information from the game control means,
The display control means may execute the same display control when an initialization operation is performed and when the change permission state is terminated.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not there is a setting change.
Note that the correspondence between (2) to (6) and (1) related to the characteristic portion 109AK can be applied to the correspondence between (2) to (6) and (A).

(Explanation about the characteristic part 110AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 110AK of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 13-7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the counting effect setting process according to the feature unit 110AK. In the characteristic unit 110AK, a counting effect of displaying a numerical value (for example, a numerical value of “3”) on the image display device 5 and displaying the numerical value in a countdown manner can be executed. When the value becomes "0"), a specific effect for notifying that the degree of expectation (big hit reliability or the like) of the variable display being executed is high is executed. The counting effect setting process is a process for determining whether or not to execute the counting effect and an effect mode (count value) when executing the counting effect. The counting effect setting process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. 7, for example.

  In the counting effect setting process, the effect controlling CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the counting effect (step 110AKS001). In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the counting effect is determined based on a display result specified from a variable display result notification command or the like transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, whether or not to execute the counting effect is determined at a different rate depending on the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 13-8 shows the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the counting effect in step 110AKS001. FIG. 13-8 (A) shows the determination ratio (the execution ratio of the counting effect) when the setting value is 3, and FIG. 13-8 (B) shows the determination ratio (the counting effect of the counting effect) when the setting value is 2. FIG. 13-8 (C) shows the determination ratio (the execution ratio of the counting effect) when the set value is 1.

  As shown in FIG. 13-8, when the display result is a big hit, the counting effect is more easily executed than when the display result is a super reach loss or other (non-reach loss or normal reach loss). Further, when the display result is a super reach loss, the counting effect is more easily executed than when the display result is other (non-reach loss or normal reach loss). By doing in this way, when the counting effect is executed, the ratio of the jackpot or the super reach becomes higher than when the counting effect is not executed, and the expectation of the player can be increased by the counting effect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13-8, in the characteristic portion 110AK, the execution ratio of the counting effect differs depending on the set value. Specifically, when the setting value 3 having the highest jackpot probability is the highest, the ratio at which the counting effect is executed is the highest, and when the setting value 1 having the lowest jackpot probability is the lowest, the ratio at which the counting effect is executed is the lowest. Has become. As described above, the higher the set value, the more easily it is determined to execute the counting effect. In this way, the set value can be suggested to the player based on the execution frequency of the counting effect. When it is suggested that the value is a high set value, a long-term game of the player can be encouraged, and the operation rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. In FIG. 13-8, the execution ratio of the counting effect when the display result is a big hit is constant (50%) irrespective of the set value, but the execution ratio of the counting effect may be changed depending on the set value.

  After determining whether or not to execute the counting effect in step 110AKS001, it is determined whether or not it is determined to execute the counting effect (step 110AKS002). When it is determined that the counting effect is not to be executed (Step 110AKS002; No), the counting effect setting process ends.

  When it is determined that the counting effect is to be executed (Step 110AKS002; Yes), the final count value in the counting effect (how many countdowns are performed from the initial value “3”) is determined (Step 110AKS003). In this embodiment, the final count value in the counting effect is determined based on the display result specified from the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like. Further, the final count value in the counting effect is determined at a different rate depending on the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 13-9 shows the final count value determination ratio in step 110AKS003. As shown in FIG. 13-10, the counting effect of the count value “3” in FIG. 13-9 is a counting effect in which the numerical value of “3” is displayed and the numerical value is deleted as it is. As shown in FIG. 13-10, in the counting effect of the count value “2” in FIG. 13-9, the numerical value of “3” is displayed, and after changing from “3” to “2”, the numerical value is deleted. It has become a production. As shown in FIG. 13-10, in the counting effect of the count value “1” in FIG. 13-9, after the numerical value of “3” is displayed and the value changes stepwise from “3” → “2” → “1”. , A counting effect where the numerical values are erased. In the counting effect of the count value “0” in FIG. 13-9, as shown in FIG. 13-10, a numerical value of “3” is displayed, and “3” → “2” → “1” → “0” is stepwise. After that, the numerical effect is erased, and thereafter, a special effect for informing that the degree of expectation is high is a counting effect.

  As shown in FIG. 13-9, when the display result is a big hit, the count value is easily determined to be “0”, and when the display result is other (non-reach loss or normal reach loss), the count value is It is not determined to be "0". By doing in this way, it is possible to increase the probability of a big hit (big hit reliability) when the numerical value is counted down (counted) to “0” by the counting effect and the specific effect is executed, and the specific effect is executed. In this case, at least a super-reach is lost, so that the counting effect and the specific effect can enhance the player's expectation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13-9, in the characteristic portion 110AK, the final count value determination ratio differs depending on the set value. Specifically, when the display result is super reach loss, the higher the set value, the more difficult it is to determine the count value “0”, and the higher the set value, the more easily the numerical value is determined. When the display result is other, the higher the set value, the easier it is to determine a larger numerical value. In other words, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the counting effect ends without executing the specific effect, and the higher the probability that the counting effect ends when the countdown (counting) does not proceed (on the way). By doing in this way, although the counting effect is executed, the counting effect ends and the specific effect is not executed at the stage where the countdown (counting) does not proceed, and the player is discouraged and the set value is high. Since it can be suggested, it is possible to improve the effect of the counting effect and to enhance the interest of the game. When the set value is low, the countdown (counting) is easy to proceed, and the count value is “0”, so that the specific effect is easily executed. Therefore, when the set value is low, it is possible to make the player expect that the numerical value becomes the specific value and the specific effect is executed, and the effect of the counting effect is improved.

  In addition, in the determination ratio shown in FIG. 13-9, when the process ends with the count value “3”, the ratio at which the set value is 3 is high, and when the process ends with the count value “2”, the set value is 2. When the ratio is high and the process ends with the count value “1”, the ratio where the set value is 1 is high. Therefore, when the count value “3” ends, it indicates that the set value is 3, and when it ends with the count value “2”, it indicates that the set value is 2, and the count value “1”. ", It can be suggested that the set value is 1. In this way, since the count value effect is indicated on the way, the set value corresponding to the count value at the time of the end is suggested, so the suggestion of the set value when the count effect is completed on the way is understood. It will be easier.

  It should be noted that the determination ratios shown in FIGS. 13-8 and 13-9 are examples, and the higher the set value, the easier the counting effect is to be executed. As long as the count value is low and the count value is easily set to “0” as the set value is low, the execution ratio of the counting effect and the determination ratio of the count value may be arbitrary. That is, as long as the same effects as in the above embodiment can be obtained, the determination ratio may be arbitrary.

  After determining the final count value in the counting effect in step 110AKS003, an effect control pattern corresponding to the determination result is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 110AKS004), and the counting effect setting process ends. The effect control pattern set in step 110AKS004 is read in the effect processing during variable display in step S172 in FIG. 7, so that a counting effect corresponding to the determination result is executed.

  FIG. 13-11 and FIG. 13-12 are examples of the effect operation when the counting effect is executed. FIG. 13-11 (A) shows that the decorative symbol indicating the number 7 in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 is stopped and is in the reach mode. ing. After that, when developing into super reach, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (B), an image indicating super reach is displayed on the image display device 5, and the ornamental design is reduced and displayed in the upper left portion. .

  Here, in the counting effect setting process, when it is determined that the counting effect to set the final count value to “0” is to be executed, as illustrated in FIG. The numerical value of "3" is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower right part) of the image display device 5, and the numerical value is changed from "3" to "2" as shown in FIGS. → It changes stepwise from “1” to “0”. Then, as shown in FIG. 13G, a specific effect is executed in which the numerical value is deleted and a character image of “heat” is displayed.

  Next, another effect operation example will be described. FIG. 13-12 (A) shows that the decorative symbol indicating the number 7 in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 is stopped and is in the reach mode. ing. After that, when the image reaches the super reach, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (B), an image indicating the super reach is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative design is reduced and displayed in the upper left portion. .

  Here, in the counting effect setting process, when it is determined that the counting effect with the final count value being “3” is to be executed, as illustrated in FIG. A numerical value of “3” is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, a lower right portion) of the image display device 5. Thereafter, the numerical value is not counted down, and the numerical value is erased as shown in FIG. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (E), a decorative pattern of a loss combination is derived and displayed. As described above, when the numerical value of the counting effect is completed at the stage of “3”, the big hit reliability of the variable display becomes low, but it is suggested that the setting value is high, so that the expectation of the player is maintained. can do.

  13-11 and 13-12 show an example in which the counting effect is executed after the reach is established. However, the counting effect may be started before reaching (before stopping the left and right symbols). .

(Modification of the characteristic part 110AK)
This feature is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. In addition, all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and some of them may be missing. In addition, this feature and other features may be appropriately combined. For example, at least a part of the configuration of the feature units 248F to 250F may be introduced into the present feature unit.

  In the above embodiment, the initial value of the numerical value in the counting effect is “3” and the specific value is “0”, but other numerical values may be used. For example, the initial value may be one of a plurality of types. By doing so, it can be expected that the numerical value becomes a specific value as the initial value of the numerical value is closer to the specific value, so that the entertainment of the effect is improved. Also, the numerical value in the counting effect is not limited to the one that counts down, but may be one that counts up. In this case, the specific effect may be executed when the counted up value becomes the specific value. Also, the numerical value to be counted does not necessarily have to be a continuous value.

  There may be a plurality of types of the effect of the counting effect (color of numerical value, counting speed, font of numerical value, initial value of numerical value, display position of numerical value, etc.). Further, the effect form (color of numerical value, etc.) may be changed during the counting effect. Then, the ratio of the specific value, the jackpot reliability, the ratio of the super reach, and the like may be different depending on the effect mode of the counting effect. Further, the set value may be suggested according to the effect mode of the counting effect. For example, red and white may be provided as numerical colors, and red may reach a specific value more easily than white (a big hit). Further, the accuracy of the setting value suggested when the counting effect ends in the middle of red may be higher than that of white. Also, a plurality of counting speeds may be provided, and the rate of reaching a specific value (big hit) may be varied according to the counting speed. Further, the accuracy of the setting value suggested when the counting effect ends in the middle may be changed according to the counting speed. By doing in this way, attention can be paid to the counting effect.

  Alternatively, a counting effect may be performed in which the counting is temporarily stopped and then the counting is restarted. For example, if another effect (notification effect, reach effect, etc.) is executed during the execution of the counting effect, the counting effect (counting) is interrupted during the execution of the other effect, and the other effect is stopped. After the end, the counting effect (counting) may be restarted.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the counting effect is an effect indicating the degree of expectation of the variable display (the change notice advance notice effect), but is an effect indicating the degree of expectation of the variable display before execution (pre-read notice effect). Is also good. Further, the counting effect may be performed over a plurality of variable displays. The counting effect may be executed in the big hit game state.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the specific effect is an effect indicating that the big hit reliability is high (an effect indicating that a big hit is obtained), but any effect that indicates that it is advantageous for the player may be used. For example, an effect that suggests an advantageous jackpot type (an effect that indicates whether the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot or the probability of a jackpot change), or that the game state is in the stable state when the game state is not reported. May be an effect suggesting that In the case where the counting effect is executed in the big hit game state, an effect indicating the number of rounds of the big hit or an effect indicating promotion to the certainty big hit may be used. In a gaming machine that can be controlled to be in a probable change state based on a game ball entering a specific area within the special winning opening, an effect indicating that a game ball has entered a specific area may be used.

(Explanation of the means related to the characteristic part 110AK)
As a pachinko gaming machine capable of setting a set value, for example, a pachinko gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has been proposed. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, an effect of suggesting a set value can be executed.
In such a gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the method of production.
The gaming machine according to the characteristic portion 110AK is made in view of the above-mentioned situation, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine with an improved performance and a more interesting game.
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 110AK is:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that performs a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3) among a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player )When,
Numerical value display means for changing and displaying a numerical value (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing a counting effect);
Specific effect executing means (for example, an effect for executing a specific effect) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, FIG. 13-11 (G)) when the numerical value displayed by the numerical value display means becomes a specific value (for example, “0”). A control CPU 120).
The numerical display means,
When the display of the numerical value is ended after the numerical value is changed to the specific value (for example, FIG. 13-11), and when the display of the numerical value is ended before the numerical value is changed to the specific value (for example, FIG. 13-12) And,
The more the set value is advantageous to the player, the higher the ratio of terminating the display of the numerical value before changing the numerical value to the specific value (for example, the higher the set value in 110AKS003, the higher the count value “0”). Is difficult to determine).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, as a gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 110AK that solves the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902A,
(A) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that performs a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3) among a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player )When,
Numerical value display means for changing and displaying a numerical value (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing a counting effect);
Specific effect executing means (for example, an effect for executing a specific effect) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, FIG. 13-11 (G)) when the numerical value displayed by the numerical value display means becomes a specific value (for example, “0”). A control CPU 120).
The numerical display means,
When the display of the numerical value is ended after the numerical value is changed to the specific value (for example, FIG. 13-11), and when the display of the numerical value is ended before the numerical value is changed to the specific value (for example, FIG. 13-12) And,
The more the set value is advantageous to the player, the higher the ratio of terminating the display of the numerical value before changing the numerical value to the specific value (for example, the higher the set value in 110AKS003, the higher the count value “0”). Is difficult to determine),
further,
At least a first numerical value display area (for example, an interface area 18SG005I including a normal timer or a remaining game number display area of ART in the modified example 156SG-1) and a second numerical value display area (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer, A display unit (for example, the image display device 5) having the remaining game number display area of the additional zone in the modification 156SG-1;
A predetermined effect that updates a numerical value in at least one of the first numerical value display region and the second numerical value display region to a specific value (for example, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect, or an additional game in the modification 156SG-1) The number is added to the number of remaining games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone), and a special effect (for example, shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) and 10-23 (A)) for suggesting the predetermined effect. As described above, the effect execution means (for example, a part that notifies the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect with the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B) (for example, Effect control CPU 120);
With
The effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect on the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area as the special effect (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in FIGS. -22 (A), 10-23 (A), and 10-24 (A), the normal timer effect period, the special timer effect period, the normal timer effect period, and the special timer effect period As shown in a portion in which the sum value is notified in the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, or the modified example 156-1, the number of additional games is determined by the remaining game number of ART and the additional zone. A game machine characterized in that it is added to both of the number of remaining games).
According to this feature, interest in the game is improved. In addition, as a special effect, an effect can be executed with the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area as suggestion targets, so that the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  Note that the setting value may be suggested in a special effect mode that suggests a predetermined effect. For example, in a timer effect as shown in FIGS. 10-22 to 10-24, a plurality of types of time display sizes and colors are prepared, and the more the set value is more advantageous to the player, the more time display is performed. May be increased at a higher rate. Alternatively, the more the set value is advantageous to the player, the more flashy the color of the time display is (for example, black or blue for an unfavorable set value, or red or rainbow for an advantageous set value). ) The ratio may be increased. In this case, the suggestion of the set value is performed by the numerical display means and the special effect, and the suggestion of the set value is performed by a plurality of elements. In comparison to the above, the opportunity for suggestion and the mode of suggestion are abundant, and the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1),
The more the set value is advantageous to the player, the more easily the numerical value is displayed by the numerical value display means (for example, the higher the set value in 110AKS001, the easier it is to determine to execute the counting effect). You may do so.
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
When the numerical value is displayed by the numerical value display means, the more the set value is more advantageous to the player, the higher the ratio of terminating the display of the numerical value at a stage where the change is small (for example, the set value is set to 110AKS003. The higher the value, the easier it is to determine a higher count value).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
The numerical value display means may display a plurality of numerical values.
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4),
There may be a plurality of types of changing speed of the numerical value by the numerical value display means.
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
The numerical value display means may be capable of temporarily hiding the numerical value when the numerical value is changed and displayed.
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.
Note that the correspondence between (2) to (6) and (1) in the above-described feature portion 110AK can be applied to the correspondence between (2) to (6) and (A).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General winning opening 11 Main board 12 Effect control board 13 Voice control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Normal symbol display 21 Gate switches 22A, 22B Starting port switch 23 Count switch 30 Hitting operation handle 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 movable body 100 game control microcomputers 101 and 121 ROM
102,122 RAM
103 CPU
104, 124 Random number circuit 105, 125 I / O
120 Effect Control CPU
123 Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Display means having at least a first numerical display area and a second numerical display area;
Effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect for updating a numerical value in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area to a specific value, and a special effect for suggesting the predetermined effect. When,
With
The effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect on the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical display area and the second numerical display area as the special effect,
further,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an advantageous effect effect indicating that the player is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player;
Title notification means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the advantageous suggestion effect,
A gaming machine, wherein the title notifying means can notify a title corresponding to the advantageous suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the advantageous effect effect.